JP6902697B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

In pachinko gaming machines, which are one of the gaming machines, a back mechanism board on which a payout device and various control boards are mounted is attached to a frame member that holds a game board provided with a game area for playing a game with a game ball. It is composed. Then, in the process of dropping the game ball launched above the game area by the launch mechanism, a game is performed in which various winning devices provided in the game area are awarded a prize. In the game area, in addition to various winning devices, a center decoration, an image display device, and various effect devices (see, for example, Patent Document 1) are provided in order to enhance the game playability.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2006-1758086

However, in such a gaming machine, various unexpected effects are required. Since various production operations are performed, the number of motors and sensors used in the production device tends to increase, and measures for stabilizing the operation of the production device are required.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of stabilizing the operation of the effect device.

In order to achieve such an object, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes a plurality of effect devices each performing a predetermined effect operation and an effect control means for controlling the plurality of effect devices, and the plurality of effect devices. Has a plurality of drive sources for causing the plurality of effect devices to perform an effect operation, and in the effect control means, two or more drive sources among the plurality of drive sources cause the corresponding effect device to perform an effect operation. When the total value of the current consumption of the two or more drive sources exceeds the first regulated current value, the total value of the current consumption becomes equal to or less than the first regulated current value. , Even if the operation timing of the two or more drive sources is controlled based on a predetermined priority and the total value of the current consumption of the two or more drive sources does not exceed the first regulated current value. When the total value of the current consumption of the two or more specific drive sources, which is at least a part of the two or more drive sources, exceeds the second regulated current value lower than the first regulated current value. The operation timings of the two or more specific drive sources are controlled based on the priority so that the total value of the current consumption is equal to or less than the second regulated current value, and the interrupt processing of this time causes the first It is determined whether or not the specified current value of 1 and the second specified current value are exceeded, and if the specified current value of 1 and the second specified current value are exceeded, the interrupt process of this time is performed. Output information related to the predetermined drive source having a high priority is set within a range not exceeding the regulated current value of 1 and the second specified current value, and the specific drive source having a low priority is set in the next interrupt processing. The output information related to the above can be set.

According to the present invention, it is possible to stabilize the operation of the effect device.

It is a front view which shows the state which the glass frame was removed from a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which looked at the glass frame from the front. It is a rear view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a front view of a game board. It is a perspective view of the upper effect device. It is a front view which shows the upper effect device of an initial position. It is a front view which shows the state which the upper support part moved to the movable position in the upper effect apparatus. It is a front view which shows the state which the 2nd upper effect member moved to the movable position in the upper effect device. It is a front view which shows the state which the secondary display device has rotated and moved to a movable position in the upper effect device. It is an exploded perspective view of the upper effect device. It is a perspective view which looked at the upper base part and a base cover from the front. It is a rear view of the upper base part in the state which supported the upper support part in the initial position. It is a rear view of the upper base part in the state which supported the upper support part in a movable position. (A) is a perspective view of the first upper support portion viewed from the front, and (B) is a perspective view of the first upper support portion viewed from the rear. (A) is a perspective view of the second upper support portion viewed from the front, and (B) is a perspective view of the second upper support portion viewed from the rear. It is a perspective view which looked at the support cover part and the cover light emitting part from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the support cover part and the cover light emitting part from the rear. (A) is a perspective view of the sub-display device viewed from the front, and (B) is a perspective view of the sub-display device viewed from the rear. (A) is a perspective view of the first upper effect member viewed from the front, and (B) is a perspective view of the first upper effect member viewed from the rear. (A) is a perspective view of the second upper effect member viewed from the front, and (B) is a perspective view of the second upper effect member viewed from the rear. It is a front view which shows the lower left side effect device and the upper left side effect device of an initial position. It is a front view which shows the state which the lower left front side effect member is oscillated and displaced to the movable position in the lower left side effect device and the upper left side effect device. It is a front view which shows the state which the upper left front side effect member moved to the movable position in the lower left side effect device and the upper left side effect device. It is a front view which shows the state which the lower left back side effect member and the upper left back side effect member have moved to the movable position in the lower left side effect device and the upper left side effect device. It is a perspective view of the lower left side production device. It is an exploded perspective view of the lower left side effect device. It is a perspective view which looked at the base part on the lower left back side from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the lower left back side effect member and the lower left back side movable member from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the lower left back side effect member and the lower left back side movable member from the rear. It is the perspective view which looked at the base part of the lower left front side from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the base part of the lower left front side from the rear. It is a perspective view which looked at the lower left front side effect member and the lower left front side movable member from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the lower left front side effect member and the lower left front side movable member from the rear. It is a perspective view of the left upper production device. It is an exploded perspective view of the left upper effect device. It is the perspective view which looked at the upper left back side base part from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the upper left back side effect member and the upper left back side movable member from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the upper left back side effect member and the upper left back side movable member from the rear. It is the perspective view which looked at the upper left front side base part from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the upper left front side base part from the rear. It is a perspective view which looked at the upper left front side effect member and the upper left front side movable member from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the upper left front side effect member and the upper left front side movable member from the rear. It is a front view which shows the right side production device of an initial position. It is a front view which shows the state which the lower right front side effect member is oscillated and displaced to the movable position in the right side effect device. It is a front view which shows the state which the lower right back side effect member and the upper right back side effect member have moved to the movable position in the right side effect device. It is a perspective view of the right side production device. It is an exploded perspective view of the right side effect device. It is a perspective view which looked at the right back side base part from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the right back side base part from the rear. It is a perspective view which looked at the lower right back side effect member and the lower right back side movable member from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the lower right back side effect member and the lower right back side movable member from the rear. It is a perspective view of the upper right back side effect member and the upper right back side movable member seen from the front. It is a perspective view of the upper right back side effect member and the upper right back side movable member seen from the rear. It is a perspective view which looked at the right front side base part from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the right front side base part from the rear. It is a perspective view which looked at the lower right front side effect member and the lower right front side movable member from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the lower right front side effect member and the lower right front side movable member from the rear. It is a front view which shows the lower effect device of an initial position. It is a front view which shows the state which the effect member was removed in the lower effect device. It is a front view which shows the state which the movable support part moved to the movable position in the lower effect device. It is a front view which shows the state which the 1st and 2nd front side effect members moved to the movable position in the lower effect device. It is a front view which shows the state which the 1st and 2nd back side effect members were rotationally moved to the movable position in the lower effect device. It is an exploded perspective view of the lower side effect device. (A) is a perspective view of the lower base portion viewed from the front, and (B) is a perspective view of the lower base portion viewed from the rear. (A) is a perspective view of the first back side movable support portion as viewed from the front, and (B) is a perspective view of the first back side movable support portion as viewed from the rear. (A) is a perspective view of the second back side movable support portion as viewed from the front, and (B) is a perspective view of the second back side movable support portion as viewed from the rear. (A) is a perspective view of the first front side movable support portion as viewed from the front, and (B) is a perspective view of the first front side movable support portion as viewed from the rear. (A) is a perspective view of the second front side movable support portion viewed from the front, and (B) is a perspective view of the second front side movable support portion viewed from the rear. (A) is a perspective view of the first and second front side effect members viewed from the front, and (B) is a perspective view of the first and second front side effect members viewed from the rear. It is a control block diagram of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a functional block diagram of the main control board and the effect control board of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the special symbol winning / failing lottery table. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the symbol table per special symbol. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of a special symbol variation pattern table. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing on the main control side of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows the control process which follows FIG. 75 of the main control side main process. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing of a main control side. It is a flowchart which shows the start port monitoring control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol change start monitoring control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol change start monitoring process in FIG. 79. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol control general-purpose processing in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation start processing in FIG. 82. It is a flowchart which shows the process during special symbol change in FIG. FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing a process during display of a special symbol stop symbol in FIG. 82. It is a flowchart which shows the control process following FIG. 85 of the process of displaying a special symbol stop symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric accessory control process. It is a flowchart which shows the control process which follows FIG. 87 of the special electric accessory control process. It is a flowchart which shows the control process which follows FIG. 87 of the special electric accessory control process. It is a flowchart which shows the reset start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the production control side main processing. It is a flowchart which shows the command analysis processing in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the effect content determination process in FIG. 91. It is a flowchart which shows the error effect content determination process in FIG. 91. It is a flowchart which shows the lamp effect interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the lamp request processing. It is a flowchart which shows the reception interrupt processing of an effect control command. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing on the effect control side. It is a schematic diagram which provides the explanation of the priority level of each interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the device control data output processing in FIG. 98. (A) is a flowchart showing the initialization operation process when the power is turned on, (B) is a flowchart showing the error recovery process when the number of steps is exceeded, and (C) is the error recovery process when the position check error occurs. (D) is a flowchart showing an error recovery process at the time of a time monitoring check error. It is a flowchart which shows the initial position return processing. It is a flowchart which shows the control process which follows FIG. 102 of the initial position return process. It is a flowchart which shows the control process which follows FIG. 103 of the initial position return process. It is a flowchart which shows the character initialization process. It is a schematic diagram which shows the relationship of the counter value of the operation pulse when the initial position sensor, the intermediate position sensor, and the movable position sensor are provided. It is a schematic diagram which shows the relationship of the counter value of the operation pulse when the initial position sensor and the movable position sensor are provided. It is a schematic diagram which shows the 1st setting example which sets the error determination value of the step number over error. It is a schematic diagram which shows the 2nd setting example which sets the error determination value of the step number over error. It is a figure which shows the 1st example of the operation table. It is a figure which shows the 2nd example of the operation table. It is a table which shows the relationship between the current consumption value of the drive motor and the regulation current value in each effect device. It is a table which shows the example of the simultaneous drive pattern. It is a schematic diagram which shows the relationship of the counter value of the operation pulse when only the initial position sensor is provided when the effect member reciprocates. It is a schematic diagram which shows the relationship of the counter value of the operation pulse in the case where the effect member performs continuous rotational movement, and when only the initial position sensor is provided.

Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. The pachinko gaming machine PM is shown in FIGS. 1 to 3 as the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko gaming machine PM will be described with reference to this figure. The pachinko gaming machine PM of the present embodiment is a model in which two functions equivalent to those of the conventional first-class pachinko gaming machine are mixed, and the first game (first special symbol game) and the second game (first special symbol game) Achieves compatibility with the second special symbol game). In the present embodiment, the directions indicated by the arrows in FIG. 2 will be described as the vertical direction, the front-back direction, and the left-right direction, respectively.

[Overall configuration of pachinko gaming machines]
First, the basic structure on the front side of the pachinko gaming machine PM will be described. As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko gaming machine PM has an outer frame 1 that forms a vertically fixed holding frame configured in an outer square frame size, and an opening / closing mounting frame that is configured in a square frame size that matches the outer frame 1. It is mainly composed of the front frame 2. The front frame 2 is attached to the front opening of the outer frame 1 so as to be openable, closable, and detachable by the upper and lower hinge mechanisms 3a and 3b arranged on the outer frame 1 and the left edge of the front frame 2. .. Further, the front frame 2 is always held in a closed state in which it is engaged and connected to the outer frame 1 by using a locking device 4 called a double lock provided on the right edge portion.

On the front side of the front frame 2, as shown in FIG. 2, a square glass frame 5 matching the upper front area of the front frame 2 opens and closes sideways and is attached and detached by using the upper and lower hinge mechanisms 3a and 3b. Can be assembled. The glass frame 5 is always held in a closed state covering the front surface of the front frame 2 by utilizing the locking device 4 described above. As shown in FIG. 1, the game board 50 is detachably set and held in the accommodating frame 2a provided on the upper side of the front frame 2, and the game board 50 is passed through the double glazing 5a of the glass frame 5 which is always closed and held. The game area PA provided on the front surface of the glass is visible. Note that the detailed description of the game area PA is omitted in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 2, upper and lower ball plates (upper ball plate 6a and lower ball plate 6b) for storing game balls are provided on the front side of the lower left portion of the glass frame 5. An effect button 10 pressed by a player is provided on the front side of the lower center of the glass frame 5. On the upper front side of the glass frame 5, a frame lamp 7 that emits light according to the development status of the game and a speaker 8 that generates a sound effect according to the development status of the game are provided.

As shown in FIG. 1, a launch handle 9 for launching a game ball is provided in the lower right portion of the front frame 2. In the area behind the glass frame 5 (hereinafter referred to as the game auxiliary board 20) in the lower part of the front frame 2, the ball feeding mechanism 21 and the ball feeding mechanism that feed the game balls stored in the upper ball plate 6a one by one. A launch mechanism 22 or the like for launching the game ball sent out from the 21 toward the game area PA is provided.

Next, the basic structure on the rear surface side of the pachinko gaming machine PM will be described. As shown in FIG. 3, on the rear surface side of the front frame 2, a back mechanism board 30 having a front-rear communication window in the center and formed in a rectangular frame shape slightly smaller than the front frame 2 is attached. There is. In each part of the back mechanism board 30, a tank member 33 for storing the game balls supplied from the game facility side, a gutter member 34 for flowing down the game balls supplied from the tank member 33, and a game ball for flowing down the gutter member 34 are provided. A prize ball payout unit 35 to be paid out, a back passage member 36 and the like for allowing the game balls paid out from the prize ball payout unit 35 to flow down to the upper ball plate 6a or the lower ball plate 6b are provided. Further, a game board cover 39 that covers the rear side of the game board 100 as a whole is attached to the back mechanism board 30.

On the rear side of the game board 50, there are a main control board (main control board unit) 100 that comprehensively controls the operation of the pachinko gaming machine PM, and an effect control board (effect control board unit) 200 that controls the overall effect. An image control board (image control board unit) 300 or the like that controls image display and sound effects according to the game development is attached. On the other hand, on the rear side of the back mechanism board 30, there is a payout control board (payout control board unit) 400 that controls the launch and payout of the game ball, and various control boards and electricity that receive power from the game facility side. A power supply board (power supply board unit) 450 or the like that supplies electric power to electronic components is attached. In order to prevent unauthorized modification, these control boards are assembled in a transparent resin board case having a caulking structure and a sealing seal structure, and are on the rear side of the game board 50 or the rear side of the back mechanism board 30. It is arranged in each. These control boards and the electrical and electronic components of each part of the pachinko gaming machine PM are connected to each other via a harness (connector cable) to enable the pachinko gaming machine PM to operate.

In the pachinko gaming machine PM, the outer frame 1 is fixedly installed on the game island (installation frame stand) of the game facility, and the front frame 2, the glass frame 5, etc. are closed and locked before being used for the game on the upper ball plate 6a. The game is started by storing the game balls and rotating the firing handle 9. When the launch handle 9 is rotated, the game balls stored in the upper ball plate 6a are sent out one by one to the launch mechanism 22 by the ball feed mechanism 21, and are launched into the game area PA by the launch mechanism 22. After that, a pachinko game will be developed.

[Composition of game board]
Next, the outline configuration of the game board 50 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 4, the game board 50 according to the present embodiment has a plate-shaped base member 51, an inner rail member 56 and an outer rail member 57 attached to the front surface side of the base member 51, and is a base. On the front surface of the member 51, a game area PA is formed in which the left side region is surrounded by the inner rail member 56 and the upper and right side regions are surrounded by the outer rail member 57. A launch passage 59 is formed between the inner rail member 56 and the outer rail member 57 so as to connect from the side where the launch mechanism 22 is provided to the upper part of the game area PA.

In the game area PA, along with a windmill and a large number of game nails, various winning openings such as a first starting port 60, a second starting port 65, an operating gate 70, and a large winning opening 75, as well as a first special symbol display device 81 (See FIG. 70), 2nd special symbol display device 82 (see FIG. 70), 1st special symbol holding lamp 83, 2nd special symbol holding lamp 84, ordinary symbol display device 85 (see FIG. 70), general Various display devices such as the holding lamp 86 (see FIG. 70) are provided. A center decoration 90 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area PA, and the screen 95a of the effect display device 95 is visibly provided through the central opening of the center decoration 90. At the lower end of the game area PA, an out port 99 is provided to discharge the ball that has rolled down without entering each winning opening to the back side of the game board 50. Hereinafter, each component provided on the game board 50 will be described in order.

The first starting port 60 is provided as a starting winning opening corresponding to the first special symbol game, and includes a first starting port switch 61 for detecting the entry of a game ball. The entry of the game ball into the first starting port 60 triggers the first special symbol lottery.

The second starting port 65 is provided as a starting winning opening corresponding to the second special symbol game, and includes a second starting opening switch 66 for detecting the entry of the game ball. The entry of the game ball into the second starting port 65 triggers the second special symbol lottery. Further, the second starting port 65 includes a normal electric accessory 67, which is also called a tongue-type chucker, and a normal electric accessory solenoid 68 (see FIG. 70) for opening and closing the ordinary electric accessory 67. Be prepared. The ordinary electric accessory 67 is variable to a closed state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting port 65 and an open state in which the game ball is easier to enter than in this state.

The actuating gate 70 is provided as a start winning opening corresponding to a normal symbol game, and includes an actuating gate switch 71 for detecting the passage of a game ball. The passage of the game ball through the operating gate 70 triggers a normal symbol lottery for determining whether or not to expand the normal electric accessory 67 of the second starting port 65.

The large winning opening 75 has a horizontal rectangular shape and is arranged below the game area PA, which is opened when a big hit or a small hit is made in the winning or losing lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. It is a mouth. The large winning opening 75 is provided with a large winning opening switch 76 for detecting the entry of a game ball, and is for opening and closing a special electric accessory 77, which is a so-called attacker device, and the special electric accessory 77. It is equipped with a large winning opening solenoid 78 (see FIG. 70). The special electric accessory 77 is variable between a normal state in which a game ball cannot enter the large winning opening 75 or is difficult to enter, and an open state in which the game ball can enter the large winning opening 75 or is easy to enter.

The first special symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 70) performs variable display and definite display of the first special symbol when the game ball enters the first starting port. Although detailed illustration of the first special symbol display device 81 is omitted in FIG. 4, the first special symbol display device 81 is composed of, for example, eight LED lamps, and the variation display of the first special symbol is expressed according to the blinking pattern of the lamps. The first special symbol is confirmed and displayed by stopping the blinking of and switching to the lighting display.

The second special symbol display device 82 (see FIG. 70) performs variable display and definite display of the second special symbol when the game ball enters the second starting port. Although detailed illustration of the second special symbol display device 82 is omitted in FIG. 4, the second special symbol display device 82 is composed of, for example, eight LED lamps, and the variation display of the second special symbol is expressed according to the blinking pattern of the lamps. The second special symbol is confirmed and displayed by stopping the blinking of and switching to the lighting display.

The first special figure holding lamp 83 and the second special figure holding lamp 84 are composed of, for example, four LED lamps, respectively, and the number of operation holding balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is determined by the lighting / blinking display of the lamps. Express (up to 4). The number of balls on hold for operation of the first special symbol is the number of game balls that have entered the first starting port during the fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol or during the execution of the special game, and the execution of the symbol variation. Indicates the number of grants that have been suspended. The number of balls on hold for operation of the second special symbol is the number of game balls that have entered the second starting port during the fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol or during the execution of the special game, and the execution of the symbol variation. Indicates the number of grants that have been suspended.

Although detailed illustration is omitted in FIG. 4, the ordinary symbol display device 85 (see FIG. 70) is composed of, for example, two LED lamps, and performs variable display and definite display of the ordinary symbol. The normal symbol hold lamp 86 (see FIG. 70) is composed of, for example, four lamps, and the number of lamps lit corresponds to the number of reserved normal symbol changes (the number of normal symbol changes that have not yet been executed). A round display (not shown) for displaying the number of round games in the special game (number of rounds: the number of times the special electric accessory 77 is continuously operated) is provided in the vicinity of the normal symbol display device 85. ..

The effect display device 95 mainly displays an effect image including a decorative symbol and a notice effect that are variablely displayed / stopped in conjunction with the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Hold display. Specifically, on the screen 95a of the effect display device 95, the decorative pattern display unit 96 for executing the variable display of the decorative pattern, the advance notice effect display, and the like, and the first special figure holding lamp 83 are synchronized with the first special figure display unit 96. The first special symbol hold display unit 97, which executes the hold display of the symbol, and the second special symbol hold display unit 98, which executes the hold display of the second special symbol in synchronization with the second special symbol hold lamp 84, It is provided. In this embodiment, a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the effect display device 95. The decorative symbol display unit 96 has three rows of display areas (left display area Z1, middle display area Z2, right display area Z3) that serve as variable display areas for decorative symbols on a predetermined effective line (not shown).
Is provided, the right symbol of the decorative symbol corresponds to the left display area Z1, the middle symbol of the decorative symbol corresponds to the middle display area Z2, and the right symbol of the decorative symbol corresponds to the right display area Z3, respectively. It is supposed to be displayed. In the normal display mode, the special figure hold display units 97 and 98 display the hold image marked with a white circle when the action hold ball of the special symbol is generated, while corresponding to the action hold ball being digested. The reserved image disappears. The reserved images are displayed in order according to the order of occurrence (order of entering balls) of the operation reserved balls of the special symbol, and a maximum of four images can be displayed on the reserved display units 97 and 98.

The center decoration 90 is installed around the effect display device 95, and has functions such as a flow path for a game ball, protection of the screen 95a of the effect display device 95, and decoration. The center decoration 90 includes a plurality of effect devices (upper effect device 500, lower left effect device 600, upper left effect device 700, right side effect device 800, and lower effect device 800) that execute production operations according to the development status of the game. 900) is provided. Each effect device is configured to include an electric drive motor (stepping motor) as a drive source. As the drive source of the effect device, another drive source such as a solenoid may be used. Further, the center decoration 90 is provided with a board lamp (LED lamp) 91 that emits light according to the development status of the game. In the following description, for convenience, the drive motors included in each effect device are also collectively referred to as "motor M". The production lamps such as the frame lamp 7 and the board lamp 91 are also collectively referred to as "production lamp LP". The effect display device 95 and the sub-display device 561 described later are collectively referred to as an "image display device DS". In the present embodiment, the LED lamp is used as the effect lamp LP, but any light emitting means other than the LED lamp may be used as long as the lamp effect effect can be exhibited.

When a game ball rolling down the game area PA enters any of the first starting port 60, the second starting port 65, the operating gate 70, and the large winning opening 75, the winning ball according to the type of the winning opening. Is paid out to the upper ball plate 6a or the lower ball plate 6b by the prize ball payout unit 35. When the game ball enters the first starting port 60 (second starting port 65), the first special symbol (second special symbol) is variablely displayed on the first special symbol display device 81 (second special symbol display device 82). At the same time, the decorative symbol is variably displayed on the decorative symbol display unit 96 of the effect display device 95 in synchronization with this. The variable display of the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the decorative symbol is stopped (confirmed display) after the lapse of the variable time determined in advance by the lottery.

When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is confirmed and displayed in a stop mode indicating a big hit, the game shifts to a special game that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game, and the opening / closing operation of the big winning opening 75 starts. Will be done. The mode of stopping the decorative symbol indicating the jackpot is, for example, an embodiment in which the types of the three symbols match. In the present embodiment, as special games, a 2R special game in which a round game is set to 2 times (2 rounds), a 12R special game in which a round game is set to 12 times (12 rounds), and a round game are performed 16 times. A 16R special game set to (16 rounds) is provided.

In the present embodiment, regardless of whether the game is shifted to the 2R special game, the 12R special game, or the 16R special game, the probability variation function of the special symbol (hereinafter, also referred to as “probability change”) may be activated after the end of the special game. .. When the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is activated, a lottery with a higher probability of a big hit of the special symbol is performed than in the normal probability state, so that a new special game will occur relatively early.

On the other hand, after the special game is completed, the function of shortening the fluctuation time of the special symbol (hereinafter, also referred to as "time reduction") is uniformly activated in addition to the probability fluctuation function. When the special symbol variation time shortening function is activated, the average variation time of the special symbol and the decorative symbol tends to be shorter than in the normal state, and the number of winning / failing lottery per unit time is improved compared to the normal state (unit time). It is possible to increase the ease of obtaining a big hit). In this example, the duration of the time saving state is set to a period of a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 50 times) of the special symbol from the end of the special game. On the other hand, if the fluctuation time shortening function is associated with the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol, it is set in the period from the end of the special game to the occurrence of the next big hit.

When the fluctuation time shortening function of the special symbol is activated, the so-called electric chew support function is activated, and the state shifts to the electric chew support state (easy ball entry state). In the easy-to-enter state, the ease of entering the ball into the second starting port 65 is enhanced by the operation of the function of shortening the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the function of probabilistic fluctuation of the normal symbol, and the function of extending the opening time of the normal electric accessory. It is in a state of being able to. In this easy-to-enter state, the number of fluctuations of the normal symbol per fixed time is more likely to increase than usual, and the ease of entering the second starting port 65 is also increased. It also increases the possibility that the number of balls entered will increase. Therefore, due to the operation of the special symbol variation time shortening function and the electric chew support function, the chances of obtaining a prize ball by entering the second starting port 65 during that period increase, and as a result, the number of balls held is hardly reduced. It becomes possible to continue the game.

[Configuration of upper effect device]
Next, the upper effect device 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 20. As shown in FIG. 6, the upper effect device 500 is provided on the upper front side of the center decoration 90. As shown in FIGS. 5 and 10, the upper effect device 500 includes an upper base portion 501, a first upper support portion 521, a second upper support portion 531, a support cover portion 541, and a cover light emitting portion 551. It includes a sub-display device 561, a first upper effect member 571, and a second upper effect member 581.

As shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, the upper base portion 501 is formed in a plate shape extending to the left and right using a resin material. The upper base portion 501 is attached and fixed to the upper front side of the center decoration 90 together with the base cover 504 that covers the rear side of the upper base portion 501. An elongated left guide hole 502 is formed on the left side of the upper base portion 501. An elongated right guide hole 503 is formed on the right side of the upper base portion 501. The upper part of the left guide hole 502 is formed so as to extend in a direction inclined diagonally to the right with respect to the vertical, and the lower part of the left guide hole 502 extends in a direction further inclined to the right with respect to the upper part of the left guide hole 502. Is formed in. The right guide hole 503 is formed so as to extend substantially parallel to the upper portion of the left guide hole 502. The right guide pin 523 of the first upper support portion 521 is slidably engaged with the right guide hole 503. As a result, the upper base portion 501 is placed on the front side of the upper base portion 501 in order to distinguish it from other initial positions (hereinafter, it does not overlap with the front of the screen 95a of the effect display device 95). (Referred to as the upper initial position) and the effect position (hereinafter referred to as the upper movable position to distinguish it from other effect positions) located at the lower left of the upper initial position and overlapping in front of the screen 95a of the effect display device 95. The first upper support portion 521 is supported so as to be movable up and down in an oblique direction. The left guide pin 577 of the first upper effect member 571 is slidably engaged with the left guide hole 502. A left guide portion 519 is formed on the left front side of the upper base portion 501 to guide the left edge portion of the second upper support portion 531 coupled with the first upper support portion 521 so as to be slidable.

An upper support drive motor 505 for moving the first upper support 521 is attached to the front side of the right end of the upper base 501. On the right rear side of the upper base portion 501, an upper support portion drive mechanism 506 that moves the first upper support portion 521 by utilizing the rotational driving force of the upper support portion drive motor 505 is provided. The upper support portion drive mechanism 506 includes a gear mechanism including a swing gear 507 that is rotationally driven by the upper support portion drive motor 505, and a drive arm 511. A gear engagement pin 508 that engages with the second engagement hole 513 of the drive arm 511 is provided on the side of the oscillating gear 507. The drive arm 511 is formed in the shape of an elongated plate using a resin material. The base end portion of the drive arm 511 is pivotally connected to the rear right lower side of the upper base portion 501, and the drive arm 511 is swingably attached to the rear right portion of the upper base portion 501 in the vertical direction. At the tip of the drive arm 511, a long hole-shaped first engaging hole 512 is formed in which the tip of the right guide pin 523 of the first upper support portion 521 inserted through the right guide hole 503 engages. An elongated hole-shaped second engaging hole 513 is formed in the middle portion of the drive arm 511 with which the gear engaging pin 508 of the swing gear 507 is slidably engaged.

As a result, as shown in FIGS. 12 and 13, the drive arm 511 swings in the vertical direction due to the rotation of the swing gear 507, and vertically moves the first upper support portion 521 up and down along the right guide hole 503. Move. The second engaging hole 513 is formed so as to extend linearly along the extending direction of the drive arm 511, and the base end portion of the second engaging hole 513 has the first upper support portion 521 at the upper initial position. It is curved so as to align with the movement locus of the gear engagement pin 508 when reaching. As a result, it is possible to prevent the downward displacement of the first upper support portion 521 that occurs based on the backlash of the gear mechanism including the swing gear 507.

An upper initial position sensor 516a that detects that the first upper support portion 521 has moved to the upper initial position is attached to the front side of the right portion of the upper base portion 501. Below the upper initial position sensor 516a on the right front side of the upper base portion 501, the first upper support portion 521 is located at an intermediate position between the upper initial position and the upper movable position (hereinafter, the upper side for distinguishing from other intermediate positions). An upper intermediate position sensor 516b that detects the movement to the intermediate position) is attached. An upper movable position sensor 516c that detects that the first upper support portion 521 has moved to the upper movable position is attached to the rear side of the right portion of the upper base portion 501. A sensor detection unit (not shown) detected by the upper movable position sensor 516c is formed on the front side of the intermediate portion of the drive arm 511 when the drive arm 511 moves the first upper support portion 521 to the upper movable position. ..

As shown in FIG. 14, the first upper support portion 521 is formed in a plate shape extending to the left and right using a resin material. The first upper support portion 521 is coupled to the second upper support portion 531 so as to cover the rear side of the second upper support portion 531. As a result, the first upper support portion 521 and the second upper support portion 531 are supported so as to be movable up and down in an oblique direction between the upper initial position and the upper movable position with respect to the upper base portion 501. On the rear side of the right side of the first upper support portion 521, a right guide pin 523 that engages with the right guide hole 503 of the upper base portion 501 and the first engagement hole 512 of the drive arm 511 is provided. When the first upper support portion 521 moves to the upper initial position on the right rear side of the first upper support portion 521, it is detected by the upper initial position sensor 516a, and when the first upper support portion 521 moves to the upper intermediate position. A sensor detection unit 524 detected by the upper intermediate position sensor 516b is formed. An elongated guide pin insertion hole 525 extending to the left and right is formed in the upper left portion of the first upper support portion 521. The left guide pin 577 of the first upper effect member 571 is inserted into the guide pin insertion hole 525.

As shown in FIG. 15, the second upper support portion 531 is formed in a plate shape extending to the left and right using a resin material. A display device coupling portion 532 that couples with the rotation coupling portion 563 of the sub-display device 561 is formed in the central portion of the second upper support portion 531. The second upper support portion 531 supports the sub-display device 561 so that the screen 561a faces forward in a state where the rotary coupling portion 563 of the sub-display device 561 and the display device coupling portion 532 are coupled. The sub-display device 561 is configured to be rotatable relative to the rotary coupling portion 563. As a result, in a state where the rotary coupling portion 563 of the sub-display device 561 and the display device coupling portion 532 are coupled, the second upper support portion 531 is in the initial position where the sub-display device 561 extends in the left-right direction (hereinafter, other initial positions). The rotation initial position (referred to as the initial rotation position to distinguish it from the position) and the effect position rotated counterclockwise by 270 degrees (when viewed from the front) from the initial rotation position (hereinafter, the movable position to distinguish from other effect positions). The sub-display device 561 is rotatably supported along a plane including the screen 561a.

A display device drive motor 534 for rotating the sub-display device 561 is attached to the front side of the central portion of the second upper support portion 531. A rotation drive mechanism 535 for rotating the sub-display device 561 by utilizing the rotation drive force of the display device drive motor 534 is provided on the rear side of the central portion of the second upper support portion 531. The rotary drive mechanism 535 is configured by using a gear mechanism that is rotationally driven by the display device drive motor 534, and meshes with the rotary gear 564 of the sub-display device 561. An initial rotation position sensor 533a for detecting that the sub-display device 561 has rotated to the initial rotation position is attached above the display device coupling portion 532 on the front side of the second upper support portion 531. On the left side of the display device coupling portion 532 on the front side of the second upper support portion 531, the sub-display device 561 is located at an intermediate position between the initial rotation position and the movable movable position (hereinafter, the rotation is intermediate to distinguish it from other intermediate positions. A rotation intermediate position sensor 533b that detects that the rotation has moved to (referred to as a position) is attached. The rotation intermediate position is set to a position where the sub-display device 561 is rotated counterclockwise by 90 degrees (when viewed from the front) from the initial rotation position.

On the left side of the second upper support portion 531 is an elongated hole-shaped first effect member engaging portion 536 in which the rear fixing portion 576 of the first upper effect member 571 is displaceably engaged in the left-right direction. The rear side fixing portion 576 of the first upper effect member 571 and the first effect member engaging portion 536 are engaged, and the front side of the rear side fixing portion 576 is covered with the support cover portion 541 (left side portion) described later. In this state, the second upper support portion 531 supports the first upper effect member 571. The left guide pin 577 formed in the rear fixing portion 576 of the first upper effect member 571 is inserted into the guide pin insertion hole 525 of the first upper support portion 521 and slides into the left guide hole 502 of the upper base portion 501. Movably engage. As a result, while the first upper support portion 521 and the second upper support portion 531 move up and down between the upper initial position and the upper intermediate position, the left guide pin 577 of the first upper effect member 571 moves to the right guide hole 503. In order to slide and move the upper part of the left guide hole 502 substantially parallel to the above, the first upper effect member 571 moves up and down integrally with the first upper support portion 521 and the second upper support portion 531. When the first upper support portion 521 and the second upper support portion 531 move beyond the upper intermediate position to the upper movable position, the left guide pin 577 tilts further to the right than the upper part of the left guide hole 502. The first upper effect member 571 is slightly displaced to the left with respect to the first upper support portion 521 and the second upper support portion 531 in order to slide and move the lower portion of the above.

On the right side of the second upper support portion 531 is provided a second effect member receiving portion 537 that receives the rear movable portion 586 of the second upper effect member 581 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction. The second movable portion 586 of the second upper effect member 581 is received by the second effect member receiving portion 537, and the front side of the second effect member receiving portion 537 is covered with the cover light emitting portion 551 described later. The upper support portion 531 supports the second upper effect member 581 so as to be movable up and down in an oblique direction while hiding the drive transmission mechanism (upper effect unit drive gear 539, etc.) of the second upper effect member 581. An upper effect unit drive motor 538 for moving the second upper effect member 581 is attached to the rear side of the lower right portion of the second upper support portion 531. An upper effect unit drive gear 539 that moves the second upper effect member 581 by using the rotational driving force of the upper effect unit drive motor 538 is attached to the lower right front side of the second upper support unit 531. The upper effect unit drive gear 539 meshes with the rack gear portion 588 of the second upper effect member 581.

A support cover portion 541 and a cover light emitting portion 551 are attached to the front side of the second upper support portion 531. As shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, the support cover portion 541 is formed in a plate shape using a translucent resin material, and is arranged between the second upper support portion 531 and the sub-display device 561. It covers the front side of the second upper support portion 531. On the right side of the support cover portion 541, a light transmitting portion 546 capable of transmitting light from a light emitting element 554 arranged on the lamp substrate 552 of the cover light emitting portion 551 is formed.

A display device insertion hole 542 through which the rotary coupling portion 563 of the sub-display device 561 is inserted is formed in the central portion of the support cover portion 541. An initial position sensor insertion hole 543a through which the rotation initial position sensor 533a of the second upper support portion 531 is inserted is formed above the display device insertion hole 542 in the central portion of the support cover portion 541. An intermediate position sensor insertion hole 543b through which the rotation intermediate position sensor 533b of the second upper support portion 531 is inserted is formed on the left side of the display device insertion hole 542 in the central portion of the support cover portion 541. A movable position sensor insertion hole 543c through which the rotatable movable position sensor 553c of the cover light emitting portion 551 is inserted is formed on the right side of the display device insertion hole 542 in the central portion of the support cover portion 541. An initial position stopper portion 544 that regulates the (clockwise) rotation of the sub-display device 561 beyond the initial rotation position is formed in the vicinity of the initial position sensor insertion hole 543a in the central portion of the support cover portion 541. A movable position stopper portion 545 that regulates the (counterclockwise) rotation of the sub-display device 561 beyond the rotational movable position is formed in the vicinity of the movable position sensor insertion hole 543c in the central portion of the support cover portion 541.

As shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, the cover light emitting portion 551 is formed in a plate shape using a resin material, and is overlapped and coupled to the rear side of the translucent portion 546 formed on the right side of the support cover portion 541. .. A lamp substrate 552 is attached to the front portion of the cover light emitting portion 551 so as to face the translucent portion 546 of the support cover portion 541. A plurality of light emitting elements 554 that cause the light transmitting portion 546 of the support cover portion 541 to emit light are arranged on the mounting surface of the lamp substrate 552. On the left side of the mounting surface of the lamp substrate 552, a rotatable position sensor 553c that detects that the sub-display device 561 has rotated to a rotatable position is arranged.

The cover light emitting portion 551, which is overlapped and coupled to the rear side of the translucent portion 546 of the support cover portion 541, covers the front side of the second directing member receiving portion 537 that receives the drive transmission mechanism of the second upper directing member 581. It has become. An upper guide pin 556 and a lower guide pin 557 that are slidably engaged with the guide hole 587 of the second upper effect member 581 are formed on the lower rear side of the cover light emitting portion 551. The upper guide pin 556 and the lower guide pin 557 are arranged vertically side by side in a direction inclined to the left with respect to the vertical direction. As a result, in the second effect member receiving unit 537 and the cover light emitting unit 551 of the second upper effect member 581, the second upper effect member 581 (second light emitting effect unit 582) is changed to the first upper effect member 571 (first light emitting effect). An effect in which the second upper effect member 581 is separated from the first upper effect member 571 to the lower right at the initial position close to the right side of the part 572) (hereinafter referred to as the proximity initial position to distinguish it from other initial positions). The second upper effect member 581 is supported so as to be movable up and down in an oblique direction between the position (hereinafter referred to as a separable movable position to distinguish it from other effect positions). A proximity initial position sensor 558a that detects that the second upper effect member 581 has moved to the proximity initial position is attached to the upper rear side of the cover light emitting portion 551. A separable movable position sensor 558c that detects that the second upper effect member 581 has moved to the separable movable position is attached to the lower rear side of the cover light emitting portion 551.

As shown in FIG. 18A, the sub-display device 561 is configured to have a screen 561a capable of displaying a predetermined effect image on the front side. The sub-display device 561 is an image visually recognized by the player as an effect image via the first light emitting effect unit 57 of the first upper effect member 571 or the second light emitting effect unit 582 of the second upper effect member 581 (for example,). An image for coloring the first light emitting effect unit 572 or the second light emitting effect unit 582) and an image directly visually recognized by the player are displayed on the screen 561a. In this embodiment, a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the sub-display device 561. As shown in FIG. 18B, a rotary coupling portion 563 for coupling with the display device coupling portion 532 of the second upper support portion 531 is attached to the rear side of the central portion of the sub-display device 561. The sub-display device 561 is configured to be movable relative to the rotary coupling portion 563 (that is, the display device coupling portion 532 of the second upper support portion 531) together with the rotary gear 564 connected to the rear side of the sub-display device 561. Will be done. When the sub-display device 561 rotates to the initial rotation position on the upper rear side of the sub-display device 561, it is detected by the rotation initial position sensor 533a, and when the sub-display device 561 rotates to the rotation intermediate position, the rotation intermediate position sensor 533b When the sub-display device 561 is rotationally moved to the rotatable movable position, the sensor detection unit 565 detected by the rotary movable position sensor 553c is attached.

As shown in FIG. 19, the first upper effect member 571 is formed in a plate shape bent into a "U" shape when viewed from above using a translucent resin material, and is provided with a predetermined decoration. It also has a first light emitting effect portion 572 and a rear side fixing portion 576 that is displaceably engaged with the first effect member engaging portion 536 of the second upper support portion 531. In a state where the rear side fixing portion 576 is engaged with the first effect member engaging portion 536 and supported by the second upper support portion 531, the first light emitting effect unit 572 is moved to the left front of the screen 561a of the sub display device 561. It is designed to be placed. That is, the left side portion of the sub-display device 561 is arranged between the front side portion (first light emitting effect unit 572) and the rear side portion (rear side fixing portion 576) of the first upper effect member 571. A left guide pin 577 is formed at the rear of the rear fixing portion 576 so as to project rearward of the rear fixing portion 576. As described above, the left guide pin 577 is inserted into the guide pin insertion hole 525 of the first upper support portion 521 and is slidably engaged with the left guide hole 502 of the upper base portion 501. An elongated hole-shaped guide hole portion 578 extending in the left-right direction is formed in the lower left of the rear side fixing portion 576 in the rear side portion of the first upper effect member 571. The guide hole portion 578 engages with the guide support portion 547 formed on the left rear side of the support cover portion 541 and is supported so as to be displaceable to the left and right.

As shown in FIG. 20, the second upper effect member 581 is formed in a plate shape bent into a "U" shape when viewed from above using a translucent resin material, and is provided with a predetermined decoration. It also has a second light emitting effect unit 582 and a rear movable portion 586 received by the second effect member receiving unit 537 of the second upper support portion 531. The second light emitting effect unit 582 is sub-displayed in a state where the rear movable portion 586 is received by the second effect member receiving unit 537 and supported by the second upper support portion 531 (and the cover light emitting unit 551) so as to be vertically movable. It is arranged on the right front side of the screen 561a of the device 561. That is, the right side portion of the sub-display device 561 is arranged between the front side portion (second light emitting effect portion 582) and the rear side portion (rear side movable portion 586) of the second upper effect member 581. The second light emitting effect unit 582 is arranged on a surface parallel to the screen 561a of the sub-display device 561 passing through the first light emitting effect unit 572 (hereinafter, may be referred to as an arrangement surface).

When the second upper effect member 581 moves to the initial proximity position, the first light emitting effect unit 572 of the first upper effect member 571 and the second light emitting effect unit 582 of the second upper effect member 581 are integrated side by side side by side. When visually recognized from the front, the front of the screen 561a of the sub-display device 561 is covered by the first light emitting effect unit 572 and the second light emitting effect unit 582. In this state, when the sub-display device 561 displays the effect image on the screen 561a, the light emitted from the screen 561a is transmitted through the first light emission effect unit 572 or the second light emission effect unit 582. Further, when the first light emitting effect unit 572 of the first upper effect member 571 and the second light emitting effect unit 582 of the second upper effect member 581 are integrated side by side side by side, an integral decorative shape (for example, a predetermined character) is formed. It is designed to form a row).

An elongated guide hole 587 is formed in the center of the rear movable portion 586. The guide hole 587 is formed so as to extend in a direction obliquely inclined to the left with respect to the vertical direction. The upper guide pin 556 and the lower guide pin 557 of the cover light emitting portion 551 are slidably engaged with the guide hole 587. A rack gear portion 588 that meshes with the upper effect portion drive gear 539 of the second upper support portion 531 is formed on the left side portion of the rear movable portion 586. When the second upper effect member 581 moves to the proximity initial position on the front left side of the rear movable portion 586, it is detected by the proximity initial position sensor 558a, and when the second upper effect member 581 moves to the separable movable position, the separate movable position sensor A sensor detection unit 589 detected by 558c is formed.

In the upper effect device 500 configured as described above, in the normal gaming state (waiting for effect), as shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, the first upper support portion 521 and the second upper support portion 531 are on the upper side. It moves to the initial position, the sub-display device 561 rotates to the initial rotation position, and the second upper effect member 581 moves to the near initial position. At this time, the first light emitting effect unit 572 of the first upper effect member 571 and the second light emitting effect unit 582 of the second upper effect member 581 are integrated side by side side by side, and when visually recognized from the front, the first light emitting effect unit The front of the screen 561a of the sub-display device 561 is covered by the 572 and the second light emitting effect unit 582. At this time, the integrated first light emitting effect unit 572 and the second light emitting effect unit 582, together with the first upper support unit 521 and the second upper support unit 531, do not overlap in front of the screen 95a of the effect display device 95. Located at the top of decoration 90. In this state, when the sub-display device 561 displays the effect image on the screen 561a, the light emitted from the screen 561a passes through the first light emission effect unit 572 or the second light emission effect unit 582. As a result, the first light emitting effect unit 572 and the second light emitting effect unit 582 emit light so as to be colored according to the effect image displayed on the screen 561a of the sub-display device 561.

In a predetermined gaming state (during the effect operation), as shown in FIG. 7, the first upper support portion 521 and the second upper support portion 531 can be moved upward from the upper initial position to the lower left by the upper support portion drive motor 505 or the like. Move to position. At this time, the integrated first light emitting effect unit 572 and the second light emitting effect unit 582 move to the lower left together with the first upper support portion 521 and the second upper support portion 531 and move in front of the screen 95a of the effect display device 95. Overlaps on. At this time, since the left guide pin 577 of the first upper effect member 571 slides from the upper part to the lower part of the left guide hole 502 in the upper base portion 501, the first upper effect member 571 slides to the first upper support portion 521 and the first upper support portion 521. 2 It is slightly displaced to the left with respect to the upper support portion 531. Therefore, a gap is formed between the first light emitting effect unit 527 of the first upper effect member 571 and the second light emitting effect unit 582 of the second upper effect member 581. Further, the displacement of the first upper effect member 571 to the left prevents the sub-display device 561 from coming into contact with the first upper effect member 571 when rotating. The first upper support portion 521 and the second upper support portion 531 (integrated first light emitting effect unit 572 and second light emitting effect unit 582) are placed at the upper initial position and the upper intermediate position by the upper support unit drive motor 505 or the like. It is also possible to perform an effect operation of repeatedly reciprocating with (or near the upper intermediate position).

With the first upper support portion 521 and the second upper support portion 531 moved to the upper movable position, the second upper effect member 581 is moved from the proximity initial position to the lower right separated movable position by the upper effect unit drive motor 538 or the like. To do. At this time, as shown in FIGS. 7 and 8, the second light emitting effect unit 582 of the second upper effect member 581 is separated from the first light emitting effect unit 57 of the first upper effect member 571 to the lower right, and the first light emitting effect is produced. A part of the screen 561a of the sub-display device 561 can be visually recognized from the front through the gap between the unit 572 and the second light emitting effect unit 582. Further, by moving the second upper effect member 581 downward to the right, it is possible to prevent the sub-display device 561 from coming into contact with the second upper effect member 581 when it is rotationally moved.

In a state where the second upper effect member 581 is moved to the separable movable position, the sub-display device 561 is rotationally moved from the initial rotation position to the rotary movable position (or the rotation intermediate position) by the display device drive motor 534 or the like. At this time, as shown in FIG. 9, the screen 561a of the sub-display device 561 is in a state of extending long in the vertical direction, and the sub-display device is inserted from the front through the gap between the first light emitting effect unit 572 and the second light emitting effect unit 582. Almost the entire screen 561a of 561 can be visually recognized. In this state, when the sub-display device 561 displays the effect image on the screen 561a, the effect image displayed on the screen 561a of the sub-display device 561 does not go through the first light emission effect unit 572 or the second light emission effect unit 582. ) It will be directly visible. Further, at this time, since the translucent portion 546 of the support cover portion 541 becomes visible from the front, it is possible to display an effect image that matches the light emission effect of the translucent portion 546. In this way, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to perform a variety of unexpected effects. As the effect image, for example, an effect image integrated with the image displayed on the screen 95a of the effect display device 95 is displayed on the screen 561a of the sub-display device 561. In addition, an effect image independent of the image displayed on the screen 95a of the effect display device 95 may be displayed on the screen 561a of the sub-display device 561 during the game standby demonstration or during the execution of a predetermined effect. In addition, an effect image for coloring the first light emission effect unit 572 and the second light emission effect unit 582 may be displayed on the screen 561a of the sub-display device 561 during the game standby demonstration or during the execution of a predetermined effect.

[Configuration of lower left effect device and upper left effect device]
Next, the lower left side effect device 600 and the upper left side effect device 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 21 to 42. As shown in FIG. 6, the lower left side effect device 600 is provided on the lower left side of the center decoration 90 on the rear side of the base member 51, and is configured to be visible from the front through the transparent base member 51. Note that FIG. 6 is a diagram showing a state in which the base member 51 is removed from the game board 50. As shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the lower left side effect device 600 includes a lower left back side base portion 601, a lower left back side movable member 611, a lower left back side effect member 621, a lower left front side base portion 631, and a lower left front side movable member 651. And the lower left front side effect member 661.

As shown in FIG. 27, the lower left back side base portion 601 is formed in a plate shape extending vertically using a resin material. An elongated guide hole 602 is formed in the middle portion of the lower left back side base portion 601. The guide hole 602 is formed so as to extend so as to be inclined upward to the right with respect to the horizontal. The slide guide portion 616 of the movable member 611 on the lower left back side is engaged with the guide hole 602 so as to be slidable. As a result, the lower left back side base portion 601 is relatively left at the initial position (hereinafter, it does not overlap the front of the screen 95a of the effect display device 95) between the lower left back side base portion 601 and the lower left front side base portion 631. , Referred to as the initial position on the lower left back side to distinguish it from other initial positions) and the effect position located on the upper right of the initial position on the lower left back side and overlapping in front of the screen 95a of the effect display device 95 (hereinafter, other effect positions). The lower left back side movable member 611 is movably supported between the lower left back side movable position (referred to as the lower left back side movable position).

A lower left back side drive motor 603 for moving the lower left back side movable member 611 is attached to the front side of the lower end portion of the lower left back side base portion 601. On the lower front side of the lower left back side base portion 601, a lower left back side drive gear 604 for moving the lower left back side movable member 611 by utilizing the rotational driving force of the lower left back side drive motor 603 is provided. The lower left back side drive gear 604 meshes with the rack gear portion 617 of the lower left back side movable member 611. A lower left back side initial position sensor 605a for detecting that the lower left back side movable member 611 has moved to the lower left back side initial position is attached to the left side of the front middle portion of the lower left back side base portion 601. On the right side of the front middle portion of the lower left back side base portion 601, a lower left back side movable position sensor 605c for detecting that the lower left back side movable member 611 has moved to the lower left back side movable position is provided. An upper guide portion 606 is formed on the upper front side of the lower left back side base portion 601 to guide the rear upper edge portion of the lower left back side movable member 611 so as to be slidable.

As shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, the lower left back side movable member 611 is formed in a plate shape extending vertically using a resin material. The lower left back side movable member 611 is coupled to the lower left back side effect member 621 so as to cover the rear side of the lower left back side effect member 621. As a result, the lower left back side effect member 621 and the lower left back side movable member 611 are movably supported between the lower left back side initial position and the lower left back side movable position with respect to the lower left back side base portion 601. The lamp board 612 is attached to the front portion of the lower left back side movable member 611 so as to face the translucent portion 623 of the lower left back side effect member 621. A plurality of light emitting elements 613 that cause the light transmitting portion 623 of the lower left back side effect member 621 to emit light are arranged on the mounting surface of the lamp substrate 612. A plate-shaped slide guide portion 616 that engages with the guide hole 602 of the lower left back side base portion 601 is attached to the lower rear side of the lower left back side movable member 611. A rack gear portion 617 that meshes with the lower left back side drive gear 604 of the lower left back side base portion 601 is formed on the lower edge portion of the lower left back side movable member 611. When the lower left back side movable member 611 moves to the lower left back side initial position on the rear side of the middle part of the lower left back side movable member 611, it is detected by the lower left back side initial position sensor 605a, and when the lower left back side movable member 611 moves to the lower left back side movable position, the lower left back side. A sensor detection unit 618 detected by the movable position sensor 605c is formed.

As shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, the lower left back side effect member 621 is formed in a plate shape using a translucent resin material. A plurality of light-transmitting portions 623 arranged one above the other are formed on the front side of the lower left back side effect member 621 provided with a predetermined decoration. The light transmitting portion 623 is configured to transmit light from the light emitting element 613 arranged on the lamp substrate 612 of the lower left back side movable member 611 so as to be capable of emitting light.

As shown in FIGS. 30 and 31, the lower left front side base portion 631 is formed in a plate shape extending vertically using a resin material. The lower left front side base portion 631 uses the upper boss portion 632a formed on the upper rear side of the lower left front side base portion 631 and the lower boss portion 632b formed on the lower rear side, and uses the lower left back side base portion. Joined in front of 601. As a result, the lower left back side effect member 621 and the lower left back side movable member 611 are arranged in the gap between the lower left front side base portion 631 and the lower left back side base portion 601.

At the center of the lower left front side base portion 631, a tilt support portion 634 that rotatably supports the tilt support member 641 connected to the lower left front side movable member 651 is formed. An elongated guide hole 635 is formed on the upper side of the lower left front side base portion 631. The guide hole 635 is formed so as to extend in an arc shape curved so that the upper side is convex. The guide pin 657 of the lower left front side movable member 651 engages with the guide hole 635 so as to be slidable. As a result, the lower left front side base portion 631 extends in the vertical direction (not overlapping in front of the screen 95a of the effect display device 95) on the front side of the lower left front side base portion 631 (to distinguish it from other initial positions thereafter). (Referred to as the left-side standing initial position) and the left-side standing initial position tilted to the right and overlapped in front of the screen 95a of the effect display device 95 (hereinafter, left-side tilting movable to distinguish from other effect positions The lower left front side movable member 651 is supported so as to be swingable and displaceable.

A left-side standing initial position sensor 636a for detecting that the lower-left front-side movable member 651 is displaced to the left-side standing initial position is attached to the upper left of the tilting support portion 634 on the rear side of the lower left front-side base portion 631. A left tilting movable position sensor 636c that detects that the lower left front side movable member 651 is displaced to the left tilting movable position is attached directly above the tilting support portion 634 on the rear side of the lower left front side base portion 631. A lower left front side drive motor 637 for moving the lower left front side movable member 651 is attached to the lower rear side of the lower left front side base portion 631. On the lower rear side of the lower left front side base portion 631, a lower left front side drive mechanism 638 that swings and displaces the lower left front side movable member 651 by utilizing the rotational driving force of the lower left front side drive motor 637 is provided.

The lower left front side drive mechanism 638 includes a gear mechanism 639 that is rotationally driven by the lower left front side drive motor 637 and a tilting support member 641. The tilt support member 641 is formed in a disk shape using a resin material, and is rotatably supported by the tilt support portion 634 of the lower left front side base portion 631. The front portion of the tilt support member 641 is connected to the connecting shaft portion 656 of the lower left front side movable member 651. On the side portion of the tilt support member 641, an elongated hole-shaped engaging hole portion 642 projecting laterally (downward) of the tilt support member 641 is formed. The engagement pin 639a provided on the gear of the gear mechanism 639 engages with the engagement hole portion 642 so as to be slidable. As a result, the tilt support member 641 rotates in response to the rotation of the gear of the gear mechanism 639, and swings and displaces the lower left front side movable member 651 connected to the tilt support member 641. When the tilt support member 641 swings and displaces the lower left front side movable member 651 to the left side standing initial position on the side of the tilt support member 641, it is detected by the left side standing initial position sensor 636a, and the tilt support member 641 is movable on the lower left front side. When the member 651 is oscillated and displaced to the left tilt movable position, a sensor detection unit 643 detected by the left tilt movable position sensor 636c is formed.

As shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, the lower left front movable member 651 is formed in a plate shape extending vertically using a resin material. The lower left front side movable member 651 is coupled to the lower left front side effect member 661 so as to cover the rear side of the lower left front side effect member 661. As a result, the lower left front side effect member 661 and the lower left front side movable member 651 are supported so as to be swingable and displaceable between the left side standing initial position and the left side tilting movable position with respect to the lower left front side base portion 631. A lamp board 652 is attached to the front portion of the lower left front side movable member 651 so as to face the translucent portion 663 of the lower left front side effect member 661. On the mounting surface of the lamp substrate 652, a plurality of light emitting elements 653 that cause the light transmitting portion 663 of the lower left front side effect member 661 to emit light are arranged. A connecting shaft portion 656 connected to the tilt support member 641 of the lower left front side base portion 631 is formed on the lower rear side of the lower left front side movable member 651. A guide pin 657 that engages with the guide hole 635 of the lower left front side base portion 631 is formed on the rear side of the intermediate portion of the lower left front side movable member 651.

As shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, the lower left front side effect member 661 is formed in a plate shape using a translucent resin material. A translucent portion 663 having a character shape is formed on the front side of the lower left front side effect member 661 with a predetermined decoration. The light transmitting portion 663 is configured to transmit light from the light emitting element 653 arranged on the lamp substrate 652 of the lower left front side movable member 651 so as to be capable of emitting light.

As shown in FIG. 6, the left upper effect device 700 is provided on the upper left side of the center decoration 90 on the rear side of the base member 51, and is configured to be visible from the front through the transparent base member 51. That is, the upper left side effect device 700 is arranged side by side above the lower left side effect device 600. As shown in FIGS. 34 and 35, the left upper effect device 700 includes an upper left back side base portion 701, an upper left back side movable member 711, an upper left back side effect member 721, an upper left front side base portion 731, and an upper left front side movable member 751. And the upper left front side effect member 761.

As shown in FIG. 36, the upper left back side base portion 701 is formed in a plate shape extending vertically using a resin material. An elongated guide hole 702 is formed in the upper part of the upper left back side base portion 701. The guide hole 702 is formed so as to extend so as to be inclined downward to the right with respect to the horizontal. The slide guide portion 716 of the upper left back side movable member 711 is slidably engaged with the guide hole 702. As a result, the upper left back side base portion 701 is relatively left at the initial position (hereinafter, it does not overlap in front of the screen 95a of the effect display device 95) between the upper left back side base portion 701 and the upper left front side base portion 731. , Referred to as the initial position on the upper left back side to distinguish it from other initial positions) and the effect position located on the lower right of the initial position on the upper left back side and overlapping in front of the screen 95a of the effect display device 95 (hereinafter, other effect positions). The upper left back side movable member 711 is movably supported between the upper left back side movable position (referred to as the upper left back side movable position).

An upper left back side drive motor 703 for moving the upper left back side movable member 711 is attached to the front side of the upper end portion of the upper left back side base portion 701. On the upper front side of the upper left back side base portion 701, an upper left back side drive gear (not shown) for moving the upper left back side movable member 711 by using the rotational driving force of the upper left back side drive motor 703 is provided. The upper left back side drive gear meshes with the rack gear portion 717 of the upper left back side movable member 711. An upper left back side initial position sensor 705a for detecting that the upper left back side movable member 711 has moved to the upper left back side initial position is attached to the left side of the front middle portion of the upper left back side base portion 701. An upper left back side movable position sensor 705c that detects that the upper left back side movable member 711 has moved to the upper left back side movable position is attached to the right side of the front middle portion of the upper left back side base portion 701. A lower guide portion 706 is formed on the lower front side of the upper left back side base portion 701 to guide the rear lower edge portion of the upper left back side movable member 711 so as to be slidable.

As shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, the upper left back side movable member 711 is formed in a plate shape extending vertically using a resin material. The upper left back side movable member 711 is connected to the upper left back side effect member 721 so as to cover the rear side of the upper left back side effect member 721. As a result, the upper left back side effect member 721 and the upper left back side movable member 711 are supported so as to be movable left and right between the upper left back side initial position and the upper left back side movable position with respect to the upper left back side base portion 701. The lamp substrate 712 is attached to the front portion of the upper left back side movable member 711 so as to face the translucent portion 723 of the upper left back side effect member 721. On the mounting surface of the lamp substrate 712, a plurality of light emitting elements 713 that emit light from the translucent portion 723 of the upper left back side effect member 721 are arranged. A plate-shaped slide guide portion 716 that engages with the guide hole 702 of the upper left back side base portion 701 is attached to the upper rear side of the upper left back side movable member 711. A rack gear portion 717 that meshes with the upper left back side drive gear (not shown) of the upper left back side base portion 701 is formed on the upper edge portion of the upper left back side movable member 711. When the upper left back side movable member 711 moves to the upper left back side initial position on the rear side of the middle part of the upper left back side movable member 711, it is detected by the upper left back side initial position sensor 705a, and when the upper left back side movable member 711 moves to the upper left back side movable position, the upper left back side A sensor detection unit 718 detected by the movable position sensor 705c is formed.

As shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, the upper left back side effect member 721 is formed in a plate shape using a translucent resin material. A plurality of light-transmitting portions 723 arranged one above the other are formed on the front side of the upper left back side effect member 721 provided with a predetermined decoration. The light transmitting portion 723 is configured to transmit light from the light emitting element 713 arranged on the lamp substrate 712 of the upper left back side movable member 711 so that the light can be emitted.

As shown in FIGS. 39 and 40, the upper left front side base portion 731 is formed in a plate shape extending vertically using a resin material. The upper left front side base portion 731 includes an upper boss portion 732a formed on the upper rear side of the upper left front side base portion 731, an intermediate boss portion 732b formed on the middle rear side, and a lower boss formed on the lower rear side. The portion 732c is used to connect to the front of the upper left back side base portion 701. As a result, the upper left back side effect member 721 and the upper left back side movable member 711 are arranged in the gap between the upper left front side base portion 731 and the upper left back side base portion 701.

A vertical movement support portion 733 that supports the vertical movement support member 741 connected to the upper left front side movable member 751 via a support connection member 756 so as to be vertically movable is formed on the right rear side of the upper left front side base portion 731. Will be done. An elongated right guide hole 735 is formed in the vicinity of the left side of the vertical movement support portion 733 in the upper left front side base portion 731. The vertical movement support portion 733 and the right guide hole 735 are formed so as to extend in a direction inclined diagonally to the right with respect to the vertical direction. The right guide pin 757 and the auxiliary guide pin 758 of the support connecting member 756 are inserted into the right guide hole 735 so as to be slidable. An elongated left guide hole 734 is formed on the left rear side of the upper left front side base portion 731. The left guide hole 734 is formed so as to extend in the vertical direction. The left guide pin 759 of the upper left front side movable member 751 engages with the left guide hole 734 so as to be slidable. As a result, the upper left front side base portion 731 is located on the front side of the upper left front side base portion 731 in the upper vicinity of the lower left front side movable member 651 (lower left front side effect member 661) at the initial position of standing on the left side, and extends in the vertical direction. (Hereinafter referred to as an upper initial position to distinguish it from other initial positions), an effect located in the upper vicinity of the lower left front side movable member 651 (lower left front side effect member 661) of the left tilting movable position below the upper initial position. The upper left front side movable member 751 is supported so as to be vertically movable between the position (hereinafter referred to as a downward movable position to distinguish it from other effect positions).

An upper initial position sensor (not shown) that detects that the upper left front side movable member 751 has moved to the upper initial position is attached to the upper left side of the right guide hole 735 on the rear side of the upper left front side base portion 731. A downward movable position sensor 736c that detects that the upper left front side movable member 751 has moved to the downward movable position is attached to the left lower side of the right guide hole 735 on the rear side of the upper left front side base portion 731. An upper left front side drive motor 737 for moving the upper left front side movable member 751 is attached to the upper rear side of the upper left front side base portion 731. An upper left front side drive mechanism 738 that moves the upper left front side movable member 751 up and down by using the rotational driving force of the upper left front side drive motor 737 is provided on the rear side of the middle portion of the upper left front side base portion 731.

The upper left front side drive mechanism 738 includes a gear mechanism 739 that is rotationally driven by the upper left front side drive motor 737, and a vertical movement support member 741. The vertical movement support member 741 is formed in a plate shape extending in the vertical direction using a resin material, and is supported by the vertical movement support portion 733 of the upper left front side base portion 731 so as to be vertically movable in the vertical direction. The front portion of the vertically moving support member 741 is connected to the upper left front side movable member 751 via the support connecting member 756. A rack gear portion 742 that meshes with the gear of the gear mechanism 739 is formed on the upper side of the left side portion of the vertical movement support member 741. As a result, the vertical movement support member 741 moves up and down in an oblique direction according to the rotation of the gear of the gear mechanism 739, and moves up and down the upper left front side movable member 751 connected to the vertical movement support member 741 via the support connecting member 756. Move. When the vertical movement support member 741 moves the upper left front side movable member 751 to the upper initial position on the lower left side of the vertical movement support member 741, it is detected by the upper initial position sensor (not shown), and the vertical movement support member 741 is on the upper left. When the front movable member 751 is moved to the downward movable position, the sensor detection unit 743 detected by the downward movable position sensor 736c is formed. A stopper portion 744 is formed on the left rear side of the vertical movement support member 741 so that the protrusion 739a provided on the gear of the gear mechanism 739 can come into contact with the stopper portion 744. The stopper portion 744 regulates the movement of the upper left front movable member 751 beyond the upper initial position (upward) and the upper left front movable member 751 beyond the downward movable position (downward).

The right guide hole 735 of the upper left front side base portion 731 is inclined to the right so as to become narrower as the distance from the left guide hole 734 goes downward. On the other hand, the distance between the right guide pin 757 and the auxiliary guide pin 758 of the support connecting member 756 and the left guide pin 759 of the upper left front side movable member 751 is constant. As a result, when the vertical movement support member 741 moves downward, the amount of movement of the right guide pin 757 and the auxiliary guide pin 758 directly below is smaller than the amount of movement of the left guide pin 759 directly below. Since the upper left front movable member 751 is configured to be rotatable relative to the support connecting member 756, the upper left movable member 751 is inclined to the left as it moves downward together with the vertically moving support member 741 and the support connecting member 756. In this way, the upper left front side movable member 751 driven by the vertical movement support member 741 moves from the upper initial position to the lower movable position while inclining to the left from the state of extending in the vertical direction.

As shown in FIGS. 41 and 42, the upper left front movable member 751 is formed in a plate shape extending vertically using a resin material. The upper left front side movable member 751 is connected to the upper left front side effect member 761 so as to cover the rear side of the upper left front side effect member 761. As a result, the upper left front side effect member 761 and the upper left front side movable member 751 are supported so as to be vertically movable between the upper initial position and the lower movable position with respect to the upper left front side base portion 731. The lamp substrate 752 is attached to the front portion of the upper left front side movable member 751 so as to face the translucent portion 763 of the upper left front side effect member 761. On the mounting surface of the lamp substrate 752, a plurality of light emitting elements 753 that cause the light transmitting portion 763 of the upper left front side effect member 761 to emit light are arranged. A support connecting member 756 connected to the vertical movement support member 741 of the upper left front side base portion 731 is attached to the right rear side of the upper left front side movable member 751. A left guide pin 759 that engages with the left guide hole 734 of the upper left front side base portion 731 is formed on the left rear side of the upper left front side movable member 751.

The support connecting member 756 is formed in a plate shape using a resin material, and is rotatably attached to the upper left front side movable member 751 so as to overlap the right rear side of the upper left front side movable member 751. Right guide pins 757 extending rearwardly are formed above and below the rear side of the support connecting member 756. The upper and lower right guide pins 757 are inserted into the right guide hole 735 of the upper left front side base portion 731, and are connected to the vertical movement support member 741 by a connecting screw. An auxiliary guide pin 758 extending rearward is formed in the rear intermediate portion of the support connecting member 756. The auxiliary guide pin 758 is inserted into the right guide hole 735 of the upper left front side base portion 731 and is coupled to the vertical movement support member 741.

As shown in FIGS. 41 and 42, the upper left front side effect member 761 is formed in a plate shape using a translucent resin material. On the front side of the upper left front side effect member 761 with the predetermined decoration,
A translucent portion 763 having a character shape is formed. The light transmitting portion 763 is configured to transmit light from the light emitting element 753 arranged on the lamp substrate 752 of the upper left front side movable member 751 so that light can be emitted.

In the lower left side effect device 600 and the upper left side effect device 700 configured as described above, in the normal gaming state (waiting for effect), as shown in FIG. 21, the lower left front side effect member 661 of the lower left side effect device 600. Is displaced to the initial position of standing on the left side, and the lower left back side effect member 621 moves to the initial position of the lower left back side. Further, the upper left front side effect member 761 of the upper left side effect device 700 moves to the upper initial position, and the upper left back side effect member 721 moves to the upper left back side initial position. At this time, the upper left front side effect member 761 and the lower left front side effect member 661 are integrated side by side in the vertical direction, and a columnar integral (having a predetermined character string) effect member extending in the vertical direction (vertical direction) is formed. It becomes a state. At this time, the upper left back side effect member 721 is hidden behind the upper left front side effect member 761, and the lower left back side effect member 621 is hidden behind the lower left front side effect member 661.

In a predetermined gaming state (during the effect operation), the lower left front side effect member 661 (and the lower left front side movable member 651) is oscillated and displaced from the left lower front side drive motor 637 to the lower right left side tilt movable position by the lower left front side drive motor 637 or the like. To do. At this time, as shown in FIG. 22, the lower left front side effect member 661 is tilted to the right from the state of extending in the vertical direction (vertical direction) and overlaps the front of the screen 95a of the effect display device 95.

In a state where the lower left front side effect member 661 (and the lower left front side movable member 651) is oscillated and displaced to the left tilting movable position, the upper left front side effect member 761 (and the upper left front side movable member 751) is moved to the upper initial position by the upper left front side drive motor 737 or the like. Moves to the downward movable position below. At this time, as shown in FIG. 23, the upper left front side effect member 761 moves from the upper initial position to the lower movable position while tilting to the left from the state extending in the vertical direction (vertical direction), and swings to the left tilting movable position. It is located near the upper side of the lower left front side effect member 661 that has been dynamically displaced. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect in which the integrated effect member including the upper left front side effect member 761 and the lower left front side effect member 661 collapse.

As shown in FIG. 24, when the lower left back side effect member 621 (and the lower left back side movable member 611) is moved from the lower left back side initial position to the lower left back side movable position by the lower left back side drive motor 603 or the like, the screen of the effect display device 95 is displayed. Appears in front of 95a. Further, when the upper left back side effect member 721 (and the upper left back side movable member 711) is moved from the upper left back side initial position to the upper left back side movable position by the upper left back side drive motor 703 or the like, it appears in front of the screen 95a of the effect display device 95. If the lower left front side effect member 661 swings left and right, or the upper left front side effect member 761 moves up and down, the lower left back side effect member 621 or the upper left back side effect member 721 moves left and right. It is possible to perform a production operation with a deep three-dimensional effect.

In this way, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to perform a variety of unexpected effects. Further, the upper left front side drive motor 737 and the like are subject to the condition that the left lower side tilting movable position sensor 636c detects that the lower left front side effect member 661 (and the lower left front side movable member 651) is oscillated and displaced to the left side tilting movable position. The upper left front side effect member 761 (and the upper left front side movable member 751) can be moved between the upper initial position and the lower movable position. On the other hand, when the upper left front side effect member 761 returns to the upper initial position and the lower left front side effect member 661 returns to the left side standing initial position, the upper left front side drive motor 637 and the like are subjected to the upper left front side effect by the upper initial position sensor (not shown). On condition that it is detected that the member 761 has moved to the upper initial position, the lower left front side effect member 661 can be oscillated and displaced from the left tilting movable position to the left standing initial position. As a result, it is possible to prevent the upper left front side effect member 761 and the lower left front side effect member 661 from coming into contact with each other, and it is possible to prevent the lower left side effect device 600 and the upper left side effect device 700 from failing.

[Structure of right side effect device]
Next, the right side effect device 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 to 57. As shown in FIG. 6, the right side effect device 800 is provided on the right side of the center decoration 90 on the rear side of the base member 51, and is configured to be visible from the front through the transparent base member 51. An upper right front side effect member 898 with a predetermined decoration is fixedly attached to the upper right side of the center decoration 90 on the rear side of the base member 51. The upper right front side effect member 898 is arranged side by side above the right side effect device 800 (lower right front side effect member 891), and is configured to be visible from the front via a transparent base member 51. As shown in FIGS. 46 and 47, the right side effect device 800 includes a right back side base portion 801, a lower right back side movable member 821, a lower right back side effect member 831, an upper right back side movable member 841, and an upper right back side effect member. It includes an 851, a right front side base portion 861, a lower right front side movable member 881, and a lower right front side effect member 891.

As shown in FIGS. 48 and 49, the right back side base portion 801 is formed in a plate shape extending vertically using a resin material. A long hole-shaped guide hole 802 is formed on the lower side of the middle portion of the right back side base portion 801. The guide hole 802 is formed so as to extend so as to be inclined to the upper left with respect to the horizontal. The slide guide portion 826 of the movable member 821 on the lower right back side is engaged with the guide hole 802 so as to be slidable. As a result, the right back side base portion 801 is relative (does not overlap in front of the screen 95a of the effect display device 95) between the lower portion of the right back side base portion 801 and the lower portion of the right front side base portion 861. The initial position on the right side (hereinafter referred to as the initial position on the lower right back side to distinguish it from other initial positions) and the initial position on the lower right back side are located in front of the screen 95a of the effect display device 95. The lower right back side movable member 821 is movably supported between the overlapping production positions (hereinafter, referred to as the lower right back side movable position to distinguish it from other production positions).

A lower right back side drive motor 803 for moving the lower right back side movable member 821 is attached to the lower rear side of the lower right back side base portion 801. On the lower front side of the lower right back side base portion 801, a lower right back side drive mechanism 804 for moving the lower right back side movable member 821 by utilizing the rotational driving force of the lower right back side drive motor 803 is provided. The lower right back side drive mechanism 804 is configured to have a plurality of gears, and is adapted to mesh with the rack gear portion 827 of the lower right back side movable member 821. A lower right back side initial position sensor 805a for detecting that the lower right back side movable member 821 has moved to the lower right back side initial position is attached to the right side of the front middle portion of the right back side base portion 801. On the left side of the front middle portion of the right back side base portion 801 is attached a lower right back side movable position sensor 805c that detects that the lower right back side movable member 821 has moved to the lower right back side movable position. An upper guide portion 819 is formed on the front side of the middle portion of the right back side base portion 801 to guide the rear upper edge portion of the lower right back side movable member 821 so as to be slidable. A gear cover 836 (see FIGS. 50 and 51) that covers the front side of the lower right back side drive mechanism 804 is attached to the lower front side of the right back side base portion 801.

A link attachment portion 807 composed of a plurality of bosses is formed on the upper front side of the right back side base portion 801. The link base member 811 (see FIG. 53) is attached to the link attachment portion 807, and the left and right link arm members 816a and 816b (see FIG. 53) are swingably attached. The tip (upper end) of the left link arm member 816a is connected to the left link connecting portion 846a of the upper right back movable member 841, and the tip (upper end) of the right link arm member 816b is connected to the right link of the upper right back movable member 841. By being connected to the portion 846b, the left and right link arm members 816a and 816b form a parallel link mechanism. As a result, the right back side base portion 801 is relatively right (not overlapping in front of the screen 95a of the effect display device 95) between the upper portion of the right back side base portion 801 and the upper portion of the right front side base portion 861. The initial position (hereinafter referred to as the upper right back side initial position to distinguish it from other initial positions) and the effect position located in the lower left of the upper right back side initial position and overlapping in front of the screen 95a of the effect display device 95 (hereinafter referred to as the effect position (hereinafter referred to as the upper right back side initial position). Hereinafter, the upper right back side movable member 841 is movably supported between the upper right back side movable position (referred to as the upper right back side movable position to distinguish it from other production positions).

An upper right back side drive motor 808 for moving the upper right back side movable member 841 is attached to the upper rear side of the right back side base portion 801. On the upper front side of the right back side base portion 801, the upper right back side drive gear 809 uses the rotational driving force of the upper right back side drive motor 808 to swing the left and right link arm members 816a and 816b to move the upper right back side movable member 841. Is attached. The upper right back side drive gear 809 meshes with the rack gear portion 817a of the left side link arm member 816a. An upper right back side initial position sensor 810a for detecting that the upper right back side movable member 841 has moved to the upper right back side initial position is attached to the upper right side of the front surface of the right back side base portion 801. An upper right back side movable position sensor 810c that detects that the upper right back side movable member 841 has moved to the upper right back side movable position is attached to the upper left side of the front surface of the right back side base portion 801.

As shown in FIGS. 52 and 53, the link base member 811 is formed in a plate shape extending to the left and right using a resin material. On the left side of the link base member 811 is a left side link arm connecting portion 812a to which the base end portion (lower end portion) of the left side link arm member 816a is connected. On the right side of the link base member 811 is a right side link arm connecting portion 812b to which the base end portion (lower end portion) of the right side link arm member 816b is connected. The left link arm member 816a is formed in a plate shape extending vertically using a resin material. A rack gear portion 817a that meshes with the upper right back side drive gear 809 of the right back side base portion 801 is formed at the base end portion (lower end portion) of the left side link arm member 816a. The right link arm member 816b is formed in a plate shape extending vertically using a resin material. When the upper right back side movable member 841 moves to the upper right back side initial position on the rear side of the middle part of the right link arm member 816b, it is detected by the upper right back side initial position sensor 810a, and when the upper right back side movable member 841 moves to the upper right back side movable position, the upper right back side. A sensor detection unit 818b detected by the movable position sensor 810c is formed.

As shown in FIGS. 50 and 51, the lower right back side movable member 821 is formed in a plate shape extending vertically using a resin material. The lower right back side movable member 821 is coupled to the lower right back side effect member 831 so as to cover the rear side of the lower right back side effect member 831. The lower right back side effect member 831 and the lower right back side movable member 821 are supported so as to be movable left and right between the lower right back side initial position and the lower right back side movable position with respect to the right back side base portion 801. A lamp board 822 is attached to the front portion of the lower right back side movable member 821 so as to face the translucent portion 833 of the lower right back side effect member 831. A plurality of light emitting elements 823 that cause the light transmitting portion 833 of the lower right back side effect member 831 to emit light are arranged on the mounting surface of the lamp substrate 822. A plate-shaped slide guide portion 826 that engages with the guide hole 802 of the right back side base portion 801 is attached to the rear side of the intermediate portion of the lower right back side movable member 821. A rack gear portion 827 that meshes with the gear of the lower right back side drive mechanism 804 of the right back side base portion 801 is formed on the lower edge portion of the lower right back side movable member 821. When the lower right back side movable member 821 moves to the lower right back side initial position on the rear side of the middle part of the lower right back side movable member 821, it is detected by the lower right back side initial position sensor 805a, and the lower right back side movable member 821 is movable on the lower right back side. When it moves to the position, the sensor detection unit 828 detected by the movable position sensor 805c on the lower right back side is formed.

As shown in FIGS. 50 and 51, the lower right back side effect member 831 is formed in a plate shape using a translucent resin material. A plurality of light-transmitting portions 833 arranged one above the other are formed on the front side of the lower right back side effect member 831 having a predetermined decoration. The light transmitting portion 833 is configured to transmit light from the light emitting element 823 arranged on the lamp substrate 822 of the lower right back side movable member 821 so as to be capable of emitting light.

As shown in FIGS. 52 and 53, the upper right back side movable member 841 is formed in a plate shape extending vertically using a resin material. The upper right back side movable member 841 is connected to the upper right back side effect member 851 so as to cover the rear side of the upper right back side effect member 851. As a result, the upper right back side effect member 851
And the upper right back side movable member 841 is supported so as to be movable left and right between the upper right back side initial position and the upper right back side movable position with respect to the right back side base portion 801. The lamp substrate 842 is attached to the front portion of the upper right back side movable member 841 so as to face the translucent portion 853 of the upper right back side effect member 851. On the mounting surface of the lamp substrate 842, a plurality of light emitting elements 843 that emit light from the translucent portion 853 of the upper right back side effect member 851 are arranged. A left link connecting portion 846a is formed on the upper left rear side of the upper right back side movable member 841 to which the tip end portion (upper end portion) of the left side link arm member 816a is connected. A right link connecting portion 846b is formed on the rear side of the upper right portion of the upper right back side movable member 841 to which the tip end portion (upper end portion) of the right side link arm member 816b is connected.

As shown in FIGS. 52 and 53, the upper right back side effect member 851 is formed in a plate shape using a translucent resin material. A plurality of light-transmitting portions 853 arranged one above the other are formed on the front side of the upper right back side effect member 851 having a predetermined decoration. The light transmitting portion 853 is configured to transmit light from the light emitting element 843 arranged on the lamp substrate 842 of the upper right back side movable member 841 so as to be capable of emitting light.

As shown in FIGS. 54 and 55, the right front side base portion 861 is formed in a plate shape extending vertically using a resin material. The right front side base portion 861 uses the upper boss portion 862a formed on the upper rear side of the right front side base portion 861 and the intermediate boss portion 862b formed on the middle portion rear side in front of the right back side base portion 801. Be combined. As a result, the lower right back side effect member 831 and the lower right back side movable member 821 are arranged in the gap between the lower portion of the right front side base portion 861 and the lower portion of the right back side base portion 801. Further, the upper right back side effect member 851 and the upper right back side movable member 841 are arranged in the gap between the upper portion of the right front side base portion 861 and the upper portion of the right back side base portion 801.

A tilt support portion 864 that rotatably supports the tilt support member 871 connected to the lower right front side movable member 881 is formed in the lower middle portion of the right front side base portion 861. A plate-shaped guide wall portion 865 is attached to the front side of the middle portion of the right front side base portion 861. The upper surface of the guide wall portion 865 is formed so as to extend in a curved shape so that the upper side is convex. A guide piece portion 887 of the lower right front side movable member 881 is arranged close to the upper surface of the guide wall portion 865 so as to be slidable. As a result, the right front side base portion 861 is located on the front side of the right front side base portion 861 in order to distinguish it from other initial positions (hereinafter, in order to distinguish it from other initial positions) extending in the vertical direction (not overlapping the front of the screen 95a of the effect display device 95). (Referred to as the initial position for standing on the right side) and the effect position that tilts to the left from the initial position for standing on the right side and overlaps the front of the screen 95a of the effect display device 95 (hereinafter, tiltable to the right to distinguish it from other effect positions). The movable member 881 on the lower right front side is supported so as to be swingable and displaceable.

A right-side standing initial position sensor 866a for detecting that the lower-right front-side movable member 881 has been displaced to the right-side standing initial position is attached directly above the tilting support portion 864 on the rear side of the right front-side base portion 861. A right tilt movable position sensor 866c that detects that the lower right front movable member 881 is displaced to the right tilt movable position is attached to the upper left of the tilt support portion 864 on the rear side of the right front base portion 861. A lower right front side drive motor 867 for moving the lower right front side movable member 881 is attached to the lower rear side of the right front side base portion 861. On the lower rear side of the lower right front side base portion 861, a lower right front side drive mechanism 868 that swings and displaces the lower right front side movable member 881 by utilizing the rotational driving force of the lower right front side drive motor 867 is provided. A decorative member 896 is attached to the lower front side of the right front side base portion 861 so as to cover the base end portion (lower end portion) of the lower right front side effect member 891 and the lower right front side movable member 881 (FIGS. 46 and 47). reference).

The lower right front side drive mechanism 868 includes a gear mechanism 869 that is rotationally driven by the lower right front side drive motor 867, and a tilting support member 871. The tilt support member 871 is formed in a disk shape using a resin material, and is rotatably supported by the tilt support portion 864 of the right front side base portion 861. The front portion of the tilt support member 871 is connected to the connecting shaft portion 886 of the lower right front side movable member 881. On the side portion of the tilting support member 871, an elongated hole-shaped engaging hole portion 872 protruding laterally (downward) of the tilting support member 871 is formed. The engagement pin 869a provided on the gear of the gear mechanism 869 is slidably engaged with the engagement hole 872. As a result, the tilt support member 871 rotates according to the rotation of the gear of the gear mechanism 869, and swings and displaces the lower right front side movable member 881 connected to the tilt support member 871. When the tilt support member 871 swings and displaces the lower right front movable member 881 to the right initial standing position on the side of the tilt support member 871, the right side standing initial position sensor 866a detects it, and the tilt support member 871 is at the lower right. When the front movable member 881 is oscillated and displaced to the right tilt movable position, the sensor detection unit 873 detected by the right tilt movable position sensor 866c is formed.

As shown in FIGS. 56 and 57, the lower right front movable member 881 is formed in a plate shape extending vertically using a resin material. The lower right front side movable member 881 is coupled to the lower right front side effect member 891 so as to cover the rear side of the lower right front side effect member 891. As a result, the lower right front side effect member 891 and the lower right front side movable member 881 are supported so as to be swingable and displaceable between the right side standing initial position and the right side tilting movable position with respect to the right front side base portion 861. The lamp substrate 882 is attached to the upper front side of the lower right front side movable member 881 so as to face the light transmitting portion 893 of the lower right front side effect member 891. On the mounting surface of the lamp substrate 882, a plurality of light emitting elements 883 that cause the light transmitting portion 893 of the lower right front side effect member 891 to emit light are arranged. A connecting shaft portion 886 connected to the tilt support member 871 of the right front side base portion 861 is formed on the lower rear side of the lower right front side movable member 881. A guide piece portion 887 that can be slidably contacted with the upper surface of the guide wall portion 865 of the right front side base portion 861 is formed on the rear side of the intermediate portion of the lower right front side movable member 881.

As shown in FIGS. 56 and 57, the lower right front side effect member 891 is formed in a plate shape using a translucent resin material. A translucent portion 893 having a character shape is formed on the upper front side of the lower right front side effect member 891 provided with a predetermined decoration. The light transmitting portion 893 is configured to transmit light from the light emitting element 883 arranged on the lamp substrate 882 of the lower right front side movable member 881 so as to be capable of emitting light.

In the right side effect device 800 configured as described above, the lower right front side effect member 891 is displaced to the right initial standing position as shown in FIG. 43 in the normal gaming state (while waiting for the effect). Further, the lower right back side effect member 831 moves to the lower right back side initial position, and the upper right back side effect member 851 moves to the upper right back side initial position. At this time, the upper right front side effect member 898 (see FIG. 6) and the lower right front side effect member 891 are integrated side by side in the vertical direction, and have a columnar integrated (predetermined character string) extending in the vertical direction (vertical direction). ) The effect member is formed. At this time, the lower right front side effect member 891 and the upper right back side effect member 851 are hidden behind the lower right front side effect member 891.

In a predetermined gaming state (during the effect operation), the lower right front side effect member 891 (and the lower right front side movable member 881) is moved from the right lower front side drive motor 867 or the like to the lower left right side tilt movable position by the lower right front side drive motor 867 or the like. Swinging displacement. At this time, as shown in FIG. 44, the lower right front side effect member 891 is tilted to the left from the state of extending in the vertical direction (vertical direction) and overlaps the front of the screen 95a of the effect display device 95. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect in which the integrated effect member including the upper right front side effect member 898 and the lower right front side effect member 891 collapses.

As shown in FIG. 45, when the lower right back side effect member 831 (and the lower right back side movable member 821) is moved from the lower right back side initial position to the lower right back side movable position by the lower right back side drive motor 803 or the like, the effect is produced. Appears in front of the screen 95a of the display device 95. Further, when the upper right back side effect member 851 (and the upper right back side movable member 841) is moved from the upper right back side initial position to the upper right back side movable position by the upper right back side drive motor 808 or the like, it appears in front of the screen 95a of the effect display device 95. If the lower right back side effect member 831 or the upper right back side effect member 851 is moved left and right in response to the swing displacement of the lower right front side effect member 891 to the left and right, a deep and three-dimensional effect rich effect operation is performed. It is possible to do. In this way, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to perform a variety of unexpected effects.

[Configuration of lower production device]
Next, the lower effect device 900 will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 to 69. As shown in FIG. 4, the lower effect device 900 is provided below the center decoration 90 on the rear side of the base member 51. As shown in FIGS. 62 and 63, the lower effect device 900 includes a lower base portion 901, a first back side movable support portion 921, a second back side movable support portion 931, and a first back side effect member 941. It includes a second back side effect member 946, a first front side movable support portion 951, a second front side movable support portion 961, a first front side effect member 971, and a second front side effect member 981.

As shown in FIG. 64, the lower base portion 901 is formed in a plate shape extending to the left and right using a resin material. A rail-shaped guide rail portion 902 extending in the vertical direction is formed on the front side of the intermediate portion of the lower base portion 901. The guide rail portion 902 is slidably engaged with the guide groove portion 922 of the first back side movable support portion 921. As a result, the lower base portion 901 is distinguished from other initial positions (hereinafter, referred to as other initial positions) relatively lower (not overlapping in front of the screen 95a of the effect display device 95) on the front side of the lower base portion 901. Therefore, it is referred to as a lower initial position) and an effect position that is located above the lower initial position and overlaps in front of the screen 95a of the effect display device 95 (hereinafter, a lower movable position to distinguish it from other effect positions). The first back side movable support portion 921 is supported so as to be movable in the vertical direction. A rectangular protrusion-shaped stopper portion 903 is formed on the front side of the upper center of the lower base portion 901.

A movable support drive motor 904 for moving the first back side movable support 921 is attached to the rear side of the left end of the lower base 901. On the left rear side of the lower base portion 901, a movable support portion drive mechanism 905 that moves the first back side movable support portion 921 by utilizing the rotational driving force of the movable support portion drive motor 904 is provided. The movable support drive mechanism 905 is configured to include a plurality of gears including a pinion gear 906. The pinion gear 906 of the movable support portion drive mechanism 905 meshes with the rack gear portion 924 of the first back side movable support portion 921, and provides a rack and pinion mechanism provided straddling the lower base portion 901 and the first back side movable support portion 921. Configure. A movable position sensor detection unit 907 is formed on the upper right front side of the lower base portion 901 when the first back side movable support portion 921 moves to the lower movable position and is detected by the lower movable position sensor 908c. A lower initial position sensor 908a for detecting that the first back side movable support portion 921 has moved to the lower initial position is attached to the lower left front side of the lower base portion 901.

A left arm member 911 is attached to the front side of the left end portion of the lower base portion 901 so as to be swingable in the vertical direction. The left arm member 911 is formed in a plate shape using a resin material. An elongated left engaging hole 912 extending along the extending direction of the left arm member 911 is formed on the tip end side of the left arm member 911. The left engaging pin 926 of the first back side movable support portion 921 is slidably engaged with the left engaging hole 912. As a result, the tip end side of the left arm member 911 is connected to the lower left rear side of the first back side movable support portion 921. The left arm member 911 is attached to the front side of the left end portion of the lower base portion 901 together with the left urging spring 913. The left urging spring 913 is configured by using a torsion coil spring, and applies an urging force in a direction in which the left arm member 911 swings upward.

A right arm member 916 is attached to the front side of the right end portion of the lower base portion 901 so as to be swingable in the vertical direction. The right arm member 916 is formed symmetrically with the left arm member 911 using a resin material. An elongated right engaging hole 917 extending along the extending direction of the right arm member 916 is formed on the tip end side of the right arm member 916. The right engaging pin 927 of the first back side movable support portion 921 is slidably engaged with the right engaging hole 917. As a result, the tip end side of the right arm member 916 is connected to the rear right lower side of the first back side movable support portion 921. The right arm member 916 is attached to the front side of the right end portion of the lower base portion 901 together with the right urging spring 918. The right urging spring 918 is configured by using a torsion coil spring, and applies an urging force in a direction in which the right arm member 916 swings upward. The left arm member 911 and the right arm member 916 are arranged symmetrically so as to extend toward the center side of the lower base portion 901, and the first back side movable support portion 921 is arranged in the vertical direction with respect to the lower base portion 901. It is configured to swing up and down as it moves.

As shown in FIG. 65, the first back side movable support portion 921 is formed in a plate shape extending to the left and right using a resin material. The first back side movable support portion 921 is coupled to the second back side movable support portion 931 so as to cover the rear side of the second back side movable support portion 931. As a result, the first back side movable support portion 921 and the second back side movable support portion 931 are supported so as to be movable in the vertical direction between the lower initial position and the lower movable position with respect to the lower base portion 901. .. A groove-shaped guide groove portion 922 extending in the vertical direction is formed on the rear side of the intermediate portion of the first back side movable support portion 921. The guide groove portion 922 engages with the guide rail portion 902 of the lower base portion 901 so as to be slidable. A groove-shaped stopper groove portion 923 extending in the vertical direction is formed on the rear side of the central portion of the first back side movable support portion 921. The stopper groove portion 923 is adapted to receive the stopper portion 903 of the lower base portion 901. As a result, the stopper portion 903 regulates the movement beyond the lower initial position (downward) of the first back side movable support portion 921, and exceeds the lower movable position of the first back side movable support portion 921 (upper side). Regulate movement (to). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the first back side movable support portion 921 and the like from coming out from the lower base portion 901, and it is possible to prevent the lower side effect device 900 from failing.

A rack gear portion 924 having teeth extending to the left and extending in the vertical direction is formed on the left rear side of the first back side movable support portion 921. The rack gear portion 924 meshes with the pinion gear 906 of the movable support portion drive mechanism 905 of the lower base portion 901 arranged on the left side of the rack gear portion 924. An initial position sensor detection unit 925 detected by the lower initial position sensor 908a when the first back side movable support portion 921 moves to the lower initial position is formed on the lower left rear side of the first back side movable support portion 921. A left engaging pin 926 that is slidably engaged with the left engaging hole 912 of the left arm member 911 is formed on the lower left rear side of the first back side movable support portion 921. A right engaging pin 927 that slidably engages with the right engaging hole 917 of the right arm member 916 is formed on the rear right lower side of the first back side movable support portion 921.

As shown in FIG. 66, the second back side movable support portion 931 is formed in a plate shape extending to the left and right using a resin material. The first back side rotary support portion 932 is formed on the upper left front side of the second back side movable support portion 931. The first back-side rotary support portion 932 has an initial position (in the gap between the second back-side movable support portion 931 and the first front-side movable support portion 951) in which the first back-side effect member 941 is hidden behind the first front-side effect member 971. Hereinafter, it is referred to as the first back side initial position to distinguish it from other initial positions) and the effect position that can be seen from the front by rotating clockwise (when viewed from the front) from the first back side initial position (hereinafter, other). The first back side effect member 941 is rotatably supported between the first back side movable position and the effect position (referred to as the first back side movable position). The second back side rotary support portion 933 is formed on the lower right front side of the second back side movable support portion 931. The second back-side rotary support portion 933 has an initial position (in the gap between the second back-side movable support portion 931 and the first front-side movable support portion 951) in which the second back-side effect member 946 is hidden behind the second front-side effect member 981. Hereinafter, it is referred to as the second back side initial position to distinguish it from other initial positions) and the effect position that can be seen from the front by rotating clockwise (when viewed from the front) from the second back side initial position (hereinafter, other). The second back side effect member 946 is rotatably supported between the effect position and the second back side movable position (referred to as the second back side movable position).

A back-side rotary drive motor 934 for moving the first back-side effect member 941 and the second back-side effect member 946 is attached to the front right side of the second back-side movable support portion 931. On the upper rear side of the second back side movable support portion 931, a back side rotation drive mechanism 935 for rotating the first back side effect member 941 and the second back side effect member 946 by using the rotational drive force of the back side rotation drive motor 934 is provided. Be done. The back side rotation drive mechanism 935 is configured to have a plurality of gears, and at the same time, rotates the first back side effect member 941 between the first back side initial position and the first back side movable position, and at the same time, the second back side effect member. The 946 is rotated between the second back side initial position and the second back side movable position.

A first back side initial position sensor 936a for detecting that the first back side effect member 941 has rotationally moved to the first back side initial position is attached to the left front side of the second back side movable support portion 931. A first back side movable position sensor 936c that detects that the first back side effect member 941 has rotationally moved to the first back side movable position is attached to the upper front side of the second back side movable support portion 931. A lower movable position sensor 908c that detects that the first back side movable support portion 921 has moved to the lower movable position is attached to the lower right rear side of the second back side movable support portion 931. The lower movable position sensor 908c is exposed rearward through an opening (not shown) formed in the lower right portion of the first back side movable support portion 921.

As shown in FIG. 66 (A), the first back side effect member 941 is formed in a plate shape with a star-shaped decoration by using a resin material. At the base end portion of the first back side effect member 941, a first sensor detection unit 942 detected by the first back side initial position sensor 936a is formed when the first back side effect member 941 is rotationally moved to the first back side initial position. A second sensor detection unit 943 detected by the first back side movable position sensor 936c when the first back side effect member 941 is rotationally moved to the first back side movable position is formed in the intermediate portion of the first back side effect member 941. The second back side effect member 946 is formed of a resin material into a plate shape having a star-shaped decoration similar to the first back side effect member 941.

As shown in FIG. 67, the first front-side movable support portion 951 is formed in a plate shape extending to the left and right using a resin material. The first front side movable support portion 951 is formed on the upper rear side formed on the upper rear side of the first front side movable support portion 951, the intermediate boss portion 953 formed on the middle rear side, and the lower rear side. The lower boss portion 954 is used to connect to the front of the second back side movable support portion 931. As a result, the first back side effect member 941 and the second back side effect member 946 are arranged in the gap between the first front side movable support portion 951 and the second back side movable support portion 931. The first front-side movable support portion 951 is coupled to the second front-side movable support portion 961 so as to cover the rear side of the second front-side movable support portion 961. As a result, the first front side movable support portion 951 and the second front side movable support portion 961 and the first back side movable support portion 921 and the second back side movable support portion 931 are positioned at the lower initial positions with respect to the lower base portion 901. It is supported so as to be movable in the vertical direction with and from the lower movable position.

A guide rail portion 956 extending to the left and right is formed on the lower front side of the first front side movable support portion 951. The guide rail portion 956 supports the slide guide portion 976 of the first front side effect member 971 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. As a result, the first front-side movable support portion 951 and the second front-side movable support portion 961 are placed at the initial positions where the first front-side effect member 971 comes into contact with the second front-side effect member 981 on the front side of the second front-side movable support portion 961. Hereinafter, the first front side initial position is referred to to distinguish it from other initial positions) and the effect position is separated from the first front side initial position to the left (hereinafter, the first front side movable position is distinguished from other effect positions). The first front side effect member 971 is movably supported in the left-right direction.

As shown in FIG. 68, the second front-side movable support portion 961 is formed in a plate shape extending to the left and right using a resin material. On the front side of the intermediate portion of the second front-side movable support portion 961, a back-side decorative portion 962 having a star-shaped decoration is formed in the same manner as the first back-side effect member 941 and the second back-side effect member 946. An elongated guide hole 966 extending in the left-right direction is formed in the upper right portion of the second front side movable support portion 961. The upper second connecting pin 984 of the second front side effect member 981 is inserted into the guide hole 966 so as to be slidable. As a result, the first front-side movable support portion 951 and the second front-side movable support portion 961 are placed at the initial positions where the second front-side effect member 981 comes into contact with the first front-side effect member 971 on the front side of the second front-side movable support portion 961. Hereinafter, it is referred to as the second front side initial position to distinguish it from other initial positions) and the effect position away from the second front side initial position to the right (hereinafter, the second front side movable position to distinguish it from other effect positions). The second front side effect member 981 is movably supported in the left-right direction.

A front-side drive motor 967 for moving the first front-side effect member 971 and the second front-side effect member 981 is attached to the rear side of the central portion of the second front-side movable support portion 961. A front side drive mechanism 968 for moving the first front side effect member 971 and the second front side effect member 981 by utilizing the rotational driving force of the front side drive motor 967 is provided on the rear side of the central portion of the second front side movable support portion 961. The front side drive mechanism 968 is configured to have a plurality of gears so as to mesh with the first rack gear portion 978 of the first front side movable support portion 951 and with the second rack gear portion 988 of the second front side effect member 981. It has become. The front side drive mechanism 968 moves the first front side effect member 971 in the left-right direction between the first front side initial position and the first front side movable position, and at the same time moves the second front side effect member 981 to the second front side initial position and the second 2 Move to the left and right with the movable position on the front side.

A first front side initial position sensor 969a that detects that the first front side effect member 971 has moved to the first front side initial position is attached to the right side of the lower rear side of the second front side movable support portion 961. A first front side movable position sensor 969c that detects that the first front side effect member 971 has moved to the first front side movable position is attached to the left side of the lower rear side of the second front side movable support portion 961. A front side urging spring 965 is attached to the rear side of the upper left portion of the second front side movable support portion 961. The front side urging spring 965 is configured by using a tension coil spring, and applies an urging force in a direction in which the second front side effect member 981 moves (to the left) to the second front side initial position.

As shown in FIG. 69, the first front side effect member 971 is formed in a plate shape with a predetermined decoration using a resin material. The first guide member 973 is connected to the rear side of the first front side effect member 971 via the upper and lower first connecting pins 974 and 975. The first guide member 973 is formed in a plate shape extending in the left-right direction by using a resin material, and the first front side movable support portion 951 and the second front side movable support portion 961 are formed by the upper and lower first connecting pins 974 and 975. It is placed in the gap. A slide guide portion 976 is formed on the lower edge portion of the first guide member 973 so as to be slidably supported by the guide rail portion 956 of the first front side movable support portion 951. A first rack gear portion 978 that meshes with the gear of the front side drive mechanism 968 of the second front side movable support portion 961 is formed on the upper edge portion of the first guide member 973. When the first front side effect member 971 moves to the first front side initial position on the front side of the first guide member 973, it is detected by the first front side initial position sensor 969a, and when the first front side effect member 971 moves to the first front side movable position. A sensor detection unit 979 detected by the first front side movable position sensor 969c is formed.

As shown in FIG. 69, the second front side effect member 981 is formed in a plate shape with a predetermined decoration using a resin material. When the first front side effect member 971 moves to the first front side initial position and the second front side effect member 981 moves to the second front side initial position, the first front side effect member 971 and the second front side effect member 981 come into contact with each other. They are integrated to form an integral decorative shape (eg, a shape that imitates an animal). The second guide member 983 is connected to the rear side of the second front side effect member 981 via the upper and lower second connecting pins 484 and 985. The second guide member 983 is formed in a plate shape extending in the left-right direction by using a resin material, and the first front side movable support portion 951 and the second front side movable support portion 961 are formed by the upper and lower second connecting pins 948 and 985. It is placed in the gap. The upper second connecting pin 984 is slidably inserted into the guide hole 966 of the second front side movable support portion 961. A second rack gear portion 988 that meshes with the gear of the front side drive mechanism 968 of the second front side movable support portion 961 is formed on the lower edge portion of the second guide member 983.

In the lower effect device 900 configured as described above, in the normal gaming state (waiting for effect), as shown in FIG. 58, the first front side movable support portion 951 and the second front side movable support portion 961 The first back side movable support portion 921 and the second back side movable support portion 931 move to the lower initial position, and the first back side effect member 941 and the second back side effect member 946 move to the first back side initial position and the second back side initial position. The rotation moves, and the first front side effect member 971 and the second front side effect member 981 move to the first front side initial position and the second front side initial position. At this time, the first front side effect member 971 and the second front side effect member 981 are in contact with each other and integrated, and when visually recognized from the front, the first front side effect member 971 and the second front side effect member 981 provide the second front side movable support. The front side of the decorative portion 962 on the back side of the portion 961 is covered. At this time, the first back side effect member 941 and the second back side effect member 946 are hidden behind the first front side effect member 971 and the second front side effect member 981. At this time, as shown in FIG. 59, the left arm member 911 and the right arm member 916 are attached to the left as the first back side movable support portion 921 moves relatively downward to the lower initial position. It is in a state of swinging downward against the urging force of the urging spring 913 and the right urging spring 918.

In a predetermined gaming state (during the effect operation), as shown in FIG. 60, the first front side movable support portion 951 and the second front side movable support portion 961, the first back side movable support portion 921, and the second back side movable support portion 921. The 931 is moved from the lower initial position to the upper movable position by the movable support drive motor 904 or the like. At this time, the left arm member 911 and the right arm member 916 are in a state of swinging upward as the first back side movable support portion 921 moves to the relatively upper lower movable position. At this time, the left arm member 911 and the right arm member 916 use the urging force of the left urging spring 913 and the right urging spring 918 to apply a force to move the left arm member 911 upward with respect to the first back side movable support portion 921. Add.

With the first front side movable support portion 951 and the second front side movable support portion 961 and the first back side movable support portion 921 and the second back side movable support portion 931 moved to the lower movable position, the front side drive motor 967 or the like is used. The first front side effect member 971 moves from the first front side initial position to the left first front side movable position, and the second front side effect member 981 moves from the second front side initial position to the right second front side movable position. At this time, as shown in FIG. 61, the first front side effect member 971 and the second front side effect member 981 are separated from each other to the left and right, and from the front through the gap between the first front side effect member 971 and the second front side effect member 981. The back side decorative portion 962 of the second front side movable support portion 961 becomes visible.

With the first front side effect member 971 and the second front side effect member 981 moved to the first front side initial position and the second front side initial position, the first back side effect member 941 is moved to the first back side initial position by the back side rotary drive motor 934 or the like. The second back side effect member 946 is rotationally moved from the position to the first back side movable position, and the second back side effect member 946 is rotationally moved from the second back side initial position to the second back side movable position. At this time, as shown in FIG. 62, the first back side effect member 941 appears above the second front side movable support portion 961 and becomes visible from the front. At this time, the second back side effect member 946 appears below the second front side movable support portion 961 and becomes visible from the front. In this state, the first back side effect member 941 and the second back side effect member 946 and the back side decorative portion 962 of the second front side movable support portion 961 are integrated to form an integral decorative shape in which a plurality of stars are lined up. Will be done.

The first back side effect member 941 and the second back side effect member 946 have different shapes from each other. Therefore, in a state where the first front side movable support portion 951 and the second front side movable support portion 961 and the first back side movable support portion 921 and the second back side movable support portion 931 are moved to the lower movable position, the first back side effect member. When the 941 and the second back side effect member 946 rotate and move, the center of gravity of the first back side movable support portion 921 and the like moves and is easily displaced in the left-right direction. As a result, the rack gear portion 924 of the first back side movable support portion 921 may be displaced in the left-right direction and may be disengaged from the pinion gear 906 of the movable support portion drive mechanism 905 of the lower base portion 901. In the present embodiment, even if the first back side effect member 941 and the second back side effect member 946 are rotationally moved by the left arm member 911 and the right arm member 916 connected to the left and right of the first back side movable support portion 921, the first 1 The displacement of the back side movable support portion 921 and the like in the left-right direction is suppressed. Therefore, the rack gear portion 924 of the first back side movable support portion 921 is prevented from being displaced in the left-right direction and disengaged from the pinion gear 906 of the movable support portion drive mechanism 905 of the lower base portion 901. In this way, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent a failure of the lower effect device 900.

When the first back side movable support portion 921 or the like moves to the lower movable position, the left engagement pin 926 of the first back side movable support portion 921 is moved to the tip end side of the left engagement hole 912 in the left arm member 911. The right engaging pin 927 comes into contact with the end of the right arm member 916 on the tip end side of the right engaging hole 917. Then, since the left engaging pin 926 and the right engaging pin 927 become more difficult to move, the first back side effect member 941 and the second back side effect are produced with the first back side movable support portion 921 and the like moved to the lower movable position. Even if the member 946 rotates and moves, the displacement of the first back side movable support portion 921 and the like in the left-right direction is effectively suppressed. At this time, the force for displacementing the first back side movable support portion 921 and the like is easily transmitted to the left arm member 911 and the right arm member 916, but the urging force of the left urging spring 913 and the right urging spring 918. By suppressing the displacement of the left arm member 911 and the right arm member 916 in the left-right direction, the displacement of the first back side movable support portion 921 and the like in the left-right direction is effectively suppressed. Further, it is prevented that the first back side movable support portion 921 and the like move upward beyond the lower movable position and come off from the lower base portion 901. Therefore, it is possible to more reliably prevent the failure of the lower effect device 900.

[Control configuration of pachinko game machines]
Next, each control board mounted on the pachinko gaming machine PM according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 70. FIG. 70 is a control block diagram showing a control configuration of the pachinko gaming machine PM.

The main control board 100 includes a main CPU 101 that performs various arithmetic processes related to the game, a ROM 102 that stores control programs, various data, and the like, a RAM 103 that functions as a work area and a buffer memory that serves as a temporary storage area, and peripheral boards and each. An I / O port circuit 104 that inputs and outputs signals to and from the device, and a random number generation circuit 105 that operates as a separate system from the program processing (software random number) by the main CPU 101 to generate a predetermined random number (built-in random number). The main control microcomputer (one-chip microcomputer) 110 configured to include the above is mounted, and the main CPU 101 is configured to execute the main control related to the game progress according to the control program stored in the ROM 102. In addition, although not shown, the main control board 100 is reset when the clock circuit that divides the clock signal from the crystal oscillator to generate the internal system clock and the main CPU 101 malfunctions or goes into a runaway state. It is equipped with a WDT circuit that restores the normal state, a CTC circuit that enables the generation of real-time interrupts and time measurement, and the like, and these are connected to each other via an internal bus.

The main CPU 101 executes various processes related to the main control of the game by reading various control programs stored in the ROM 102 and performing arithmetic processing based on the detection information from each switch. The RAM 103 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means backed up by a backup power supply (VBB) generated on the power supply board 450. The backup area of the RAM 103 is an area for storing data such as stack pointers and registers held when the power is turned off when the power is turned off, and is used when the power is turned on (when the power is turned off and restored). ), The state of the gaming machine is restored to the state before the power was turned off based on the information in the backup area.

The random number generation circuit 105 generates random numbers in a predetermined range (built-in random numbers) according to a certain rule by updating once based on the clock signal (1 clock) from the clock circuit (1 clock 1 random number generation method). The initial value of the built-in random number is a numerical value calculated by a predetermined operation based on the ID number (unique identification information given to each microcomputer) of the main control microcomputer 110, and is changed every time the system is reset. This built-in random number forms a part of the random number per special symbol used in the winning / failing lottery of the special symbol described later.

Further, the main control board 100 is electrically connected to the first start port switch 61, the second start port switch 66, the operation gate switch 71, the grand prize opening switch 76, and the like, and is electrically connected via the I / O port circuit 104. Then, the detection signals from various switches are input to the main CPU 101. Further, the main control board 100 includes a first special symbol display device 81, a second special symbol display device 82, a first special symbol hold lamp 83, a second special symbol hold lamp 84, a normal symbol display device 85, and a normal symbol hold lamp. It is electrically connected to the 86, and further electrically connected to the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 68 and the special electric accessory solenoid 78, and sends a control signal from the main CPU 101 via the I / O port circuit 104. It transmits to various display means and various solenoids.

The main control board 100 and the effect control board 200 are connected so as to be able to communicate only in a single direction from the main control board 100 to the effect control board 200, and various types are connected from the main control board 100 to the effect control board 200. Production control command is transmitted. Data cannot be transmitted from the effect control board 200 to the main control board 100, and data transmission cannot be requested to the main control board 100.

The effect control board 200 includes a sub-main CPU 201 that performs various arithmetic processes related to the game effect based on the effect control command from the main control board 100, a ROM 202 that stores the effect control program and various data, a work area that serves as a temporary storage area, and the like. An effect configured to include a RAM 203 that functions as a buffer memory, an I / O port circuit 204 that inputs and outputs signals between peripheral boards and devices, and a serial communication circuit 205 that inputs and outputs serial data. A control microcomputer (one-chip microcomputer) 210 is mounted, and the sub-main CPU 201 is configured to execute main control related to the game production according to a control program stored in the ROM 202. In addition, although not shown, the effect control board 200 is reset when the sub-main CPU 201, which is a clock circuit that divides the clock signal from the crystal oscillator to generate an internal system clock, malfunctions or goes out of control. It is equipped with a WDT circuit that restores the normal state, a TPU circuit that outputs various signals based on the system clock, and an interrupt controller that activates various interrupts such as timer interrupts based on signals from the TPU circuit. Are interconnected via an internal bus.

The effect control board 200 is an image control command for instructing an image and sound to the image control board 300 and a lamp control signal for controlling the lamp connection board 291 in the effect control process based on the effect control command from the main control board 100. (Ramp data), a drive control signal (drive data) for controlling the motor driver 292, and the like are generated. The effect control board 200 is connected to the image control board 300 so as to be capable of bidirectional communication, and an image control command related to image and sound is transmitted from the effect control board 200 to the image control board 300, and as a response, this image is displayed. A response command (ACK command) indicating that the control command has been normally received is transmitted from the image control board 300 to the effect control board 200.

Further, the effect control board 200 is electrically connected to the lamp connection board 291 and transmits a lamp control signal (lamp data) via a serial communication circuit. In this example, the effect control board 200 and the lamp connection board 291 adopt a clock-synchronized serial transmission, and are transmitted by a signal line (clock line) different from the data line for lamp data transmission. The lamp control signal is transmitted bit by bit via the data line in synchronization with the clock signal. The lamp connection board 291 has a built-in LED driver (not shown) that functions by receiving a lamp control signal for driving an LED transmitted from the effect control board 200, and switches in the circuit based on the lamp control signal. By switching on / off, the drive current is supplied or cut off to the effect lamp LP, and the effect lamp LP is controlled to be turned on or off.

Further, the effect control board 200 is electrically connected to the motor driver 292, and transmits a drive control signal (drive data) to the motor driver 292 via the I / O port circuit 204. The motor driver 292 switches on / off the switches in the circuit based on the drive control signal for driving the accessory transmitted from the effect control board 200, so that each effect device (upper effect device 500, lower left effect device 600, The drive current is supplied or cut off to the motor M of the left upper effect device 700, the right effect device 800, and the lower effect device 900) to control the operation of each effect device.

The image control board 300 includes a sub-sub CPU 301 that performs various arithmetic processes related to image production based on an image control command from the effect control board 200, a program ROM 302 that stores an image control program, various data, and the like, and a work that serves as a temporary storage area. A RAM 303 that functions as an area or a buffer memory, a VDP 304 that generates image data according to the effect content based on a control signal acquired from the sub-sub CPU 301, and an acoustic data that generates sound data according to the effect content based on the control signal acquired from the sub-sub CPU 301. It is equipped with a sound source IC 305. The VDP 304 is a so-called image processor, which reads the image data stored in the image ROM 306 in response to an instruction from the sub-sub CPU, processes the image data, and displays the image signal (image data) generated by the image display device DS (effect display). It is transmitted to the device 95 and the sub-display device 561). A high-speed VRAM 307 used for developing and processing image data read from the image ROM 306 is connected to the VPD 304. The sound source IC 305 reads the acoustic data stored in the voice ROM 308 in response to an instruction from the sub-sub CPU 301, and outputs the acoustic data generated by synthesizing the acoustic data to the speaker 8 via an amplifier (digital amplifier) (not shown). ..

The payout control board 400 is mainly composed of a payout CPU 401, a ROM 402, and a RAM 403. The payout control board 400 is connected to the main control board 100 so as to be capable of bidirectional communication, and controls for driving the prize ball payout unit 35 to pay out the prize balls based on the payout control command from the main control board 100. Is executed, and the ball feeding mechanism 21 and the launching mechanism 22 are synchronously driven based on the amount of operation of the launching handle 12 to control the launching of the game ball.

Although not shown in detail, the power supply board 450 includes a normal power supply circuit for generating a normal power supply used in each control board and a backup power supply based on the primary power supply supplied from the power supply equipment of the game island. It is configured to include a backup power supply circuit for generating (VBB) and a power supply disconnection monitoring circuit for monitoring a power supply disconnection due to a voltage drop, and is used for electronic / electrical parts such as control boards and gaming devices. Supply the required power. A power switch for activating the power supply circuit is connected to the power supply board 450, and on the premise that the primary power is supplied from the power supply device of the game island, when the power supply switch is turned on, the power supply board A predetermined power supply is supplied to each control board or the like from the normal power supply circuit of 450. The power supply board 450 is configured to be able to detect that the power supply from the power supply device of the game island is cut off, and when the power supply cutoff is detected, the power supply cutoff signal (NMI signal) for notifying the fact is sent to the main control board 100. , The effect is transmitted to the effect control board 200 and the payout control board 400. The backup power supply circuit is charged when power is supplied from the power supply device of the game island to the pachinko gaming machine PM. Further, a RAM clear switch (not shown) for temporarily erasing the temporary storage contents of the RAM 103 of the main control board 100 and setting an initial value is connected to the power supply board 450 when the power of the pachinko gaming machine PM is turned on. ing. The RAM clear switch may be connected to, for example, the main control board 100 instead of the power supply board 450.

In the present embodiment, the configuration in which the effect control board 200 and the image control board 300 are provided is illustrated as the structure of the effect control of the pachinko gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, one (effect) control board is equipped with a sub-main CPU that performs various arithmetic processing related to game production, a sub-sub CPU that performs various arithmetic processing related to image production, VDP that generates image data according to the content of the production, and the like. It may be configured to be. Further, for example, when the effect control board 200 and the image control board 300, or three or more control boards are provided, a sound source IC that generates acoustic data according to the effect content is mounted on the effect control board 200. There may be a configuration in which the sound source IC is mounted on the third control board (in the case of three or more), and the configuration of the production control of the pachinko gaming machine can be appropriately changed. ..

[Main functional configurations of pachinko machines]
Next, various functions of the pachinko gaming machine PM (mainly the main control board 100 / effect control board 200) according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the functional block diagram of FIG. 71.

<< Main control board >>
As shown in FIG. 71, the main control board 100 includes a ball entry determination means 110, a game lottery random number generation means 120, a hold control means 130, a preliminary determination means 135, a special symbol lottery processing means 140, and a normal symbol lottery processing means 145. It includes a demonstration effect setting means 150, a symbol display control means 155, an electric accessory control means 160, a game state control means 165, an error monitoring control means 170, a main information storage means 180, and a command transmission / reception means 190. Each of the above-mentioned means on the main control board 100 is composed of hardware such as a main CPU 101, ROM 102, RAM 103, and an electronic circuit provided on the main control board 100, and software such as a control program stored in the ROM 102 and the like. It is a functional representation of something.

Based on the detection signals from the first start port switch 61, the second start port switch 66, the operation gate switch 71, and the large winning opening switch 76, the ball entry determination means 110 enters the game ball into each winning opening. judge.

The game lottery random number generating means 120 takes in the built-in random number generated by the random number generation circuit 105 by software, and adds the soft random number per special symbol described later to the random number per special symbol used for the winning / failing lottery of the special symbol. To generate. Further, the game lottery random number generation means 120 includes a random number counter for generating various software random numbers by the program processing of the main CPU 101. These random number counters play a role as random number generation means for generating random numbers by software. As this software random number, a soft random number per special symbol that is added to the above-mentioned built-in random number to form a random number per special symbol, a soft initial value random number per special symbol for determining the initial value and the end value of the soft random number per special symbol, Special symbol per symbol random number used to determine the hit symbol (combination of symbols that activates the condition device) as the stop symbol of the special symbol, special symbol for determining the initial value and end value of the special symbol per symbol random number The initial value random number of the winning symbol, the special symbol variation pattern random number used for selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol, the random number per ordinary symbol used for the winning / failing lottery of the ordinary symbol, the initial value and the end value of the random number per ordinary symbol The initial value random number per ordinary symbol for determining, the ordinary symbol variation pattern random number for use in selecting the variation pattern of the ordinary symbol, and the like are included. These software random numbers are updated once each time a timer interrupt process occurs, and the initial value random numbers are the remaining time of the interrupt cycle even while the timer interrupt process is not being executed (during loop processing). Update using.

The hold control means 130 includes a special symbol hold control means 131 and a normal symbol hold control means 132.

The special symbol holding control means 131 is a lottery random number value related to the special symbol game, which is a random number value per special symbol, per special symbol, triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 60 or the second starting port 65. The symbol random value and the special symbol variation pattern random value are acquired, and the random value is managed as operation-holding ball information of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The special symbol holding control means 131 is a main information storage means in which the operation holding ball information of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is combined with the entry order of the holding balls up to a predetermined upper limit number (4 pieces). Temporarily stored in the first special symbol holding storage area or the second special symbol holding storage area of 180.

In the first special symbol hold storage area and the second special symbol hold storage area, the hold 1 storage area (first hold storage area) and the hold 2 storage area (2) are in the order of entry into the starting ports 60 and 65. A third reserved storage area), a reserved 3 storage area (third reserved storage area), and a reserved 4 storage area (fourth reserved storage area) are provided, respectively. Each hold storage area can store a random number per special symbol, a random number per special symbol, and a random number of special symbol variation patterns as a set of operation hold ball information. The operation hold ball information is stored in the order of hold 1 storage area, hold 2 storage area, hold 3 storage area, hold 4 storage area, while hold 1 storage area, hold 2 storage area, hold 3 storage area, hold 4 storage. It is digested in the order of areas (first-in, first-out principle). Further, when the reserved ball information in the reserved 1 storage area is digested, the reserved ball information stored in the reserved 2 storage area, the reserved 3 storage area, and the reserved 4 storage area is shifted to the lower numbered storage area, respectively, and the reserved ball information is shifted to the lower numbered storage area. Hold 4 Clear the contents of the storage area to zero.

Further, the special symbol holding control means 131 includes a first special symbol holding ball number counter for counting the number of operating holding balls of the first special symbol, and a second special for counting the number of operating holding balls of the second special symbol. It has a symbol holding ball number counter. The special symbol holding control means 131 adds 1 to the corresponding counter every time one of the special symbol's operation-holding balls is acquired as an update process of the number of operation-holding balls of the special symbol, and one operation-holding ball is digested. The corresponding counter is subtracted by 1 for each.

Further, when the number of operation-holding balls of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is updated, the special symbol holding control means 131 includes an effect control command (referred to as "symbol storage number command") including the update information of the number of reserved balls. ) Is generated, and this is temporarily stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. This one command includes information on both the number of balls on hold for operation of the first special symbol and the number of balls on hold for operation of the second special symbol. As a general rule, the operation-holding balls of each special symbol are digested in the order in which they are entered, but in the present embodiment, the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed over the first special symbol. , So-called priority digestion is adopted, so that while the operation holding ball related to the second special symbol game exists, the operation holding related to the second special symbol game is held regardless of the existence of the operation holding ball related to the first special symbol game. It is configured to preferentially digest the sphere.

The normal symbol hold control means 132 is a lottery random number value related to the normal symbol game, which is a random number value per normal symbol, a symbol random value per normal symbol, and a normal symbol variation pattern, triggered by the entry of the game ball into the operating gate 70. A random number value is acquired, and the random number value is managed as operation holding ball information of a normal symbol. The normal symbol hold control means 132 stores the normal symbol operation hold ball information up to a predetermined upper limit number (4 pieces) in the normal symbol hold storage area of the main information storage means 180 in the form of being combined with the ball entry order of the hold balls. Temporarily memorize. Further, the normal symbol holding control means 132 has a normal symbol holding ball number counter for counting the number of operating holding balls of the normal symbol. The normal symbol hold control means 132 adds 1 to the corresponding counter every time one of the normal symbol's hold balls is acquired as an update process of the number of hold balls of the normal symbol, and one action hold ball is digested. The corresponding counter is subtracted by 1 for each.

When the pre-determination means 135 acquires the operation-holding ball of the special symbol at a predetermined pre-determination timing, the pre-determination means 135 executes the pre-determination of the look-ahead notice effect for the operation-holding ball. Here, the pre-reading notice effect is to make a preliminary judgment such as a winning / failing lottery for an undigested operation-holding ball for which a change display of a special symbol is pending, and give a notice to the player of the judgment result. It is a production to notify to. As an example of the pre-judgment timing, when (1) waiting for a hit and when the operation holding ball of the first special symbol is acquired while the electric chew support function is not operating, (2) waiting for a hit and electric chew If the support function acquires the operation holding ball of the second special symbol while the support function is operating, or (3) the operation holding ball of the second special symbol is acquired during the big hit or the small hit, one of the conditions is satisfied. It's time to be satisfied. Specifically, the pre-determination means 135 reads the random number value corresponding to the operation hold ball acquired this time from the special symbol hold storage area of the main information storage means 180, and pre-determines the pre-reading win / fail lottery (pre-decision of hit / fail). ), Pre-judgment of the look-ahead symbol lottery (pre-decision of the symbol), and pre-judgment of the look-ahead variation pattern lottery (pre-determination of the variation pattern) are executed in sequence. The pre-determination means 135 sequentially generates an effect control command including information on the result of the pre-determination of success / failure, and stores this in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180.

The special symbol lottery processing means 140 includes a special symbol winning / failing determination means 141, a special symbol stop symbol determining means 412, and a special symbol variation pattern determining means 143. When the change start condition of the special symbol is satisfied, the special symbol lottery processing means 140 has a random value per special symbol and a symbol per special symbol stored in the earliest storage area (hold 1 storage area) in the special symbol hold storage area. The random number value and the special symbol variation pattern random value are read out and stored in the special symbol hit / fail determination area, the special symbol symbol determination area, and the special symbol variation pattern determination area of the main information storage means 180, respectively. Here, the fact that the change start condition of the special symbol is satisfied is, for example, (1) not during a big hit or a small hit, and (2) both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are waiting for change. That, (3) when all the conditions of (3) the presence of the operation holding ball in at least one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are satisfied, and as a result, the special symbol can start to fluctuate. It is judged that there is.

The special symbol winning / failing determination means 141 reads a random number value per special symbol from the special symbol winning / failing determination area of the main information storage means 180, executes a winning / failing determination, and the determination result corresponds to any of a big hit, a small hit, and a miss. Decide if you want to. The result of this winning / failing lottery is temporarily stored in the special symbol determination flag of the main information storage means 180 (for example, big hit data "55H", small hit data "33H", missed data "00H"), and is used in the subsequent processing. After that, it is cleared when the fluctuation of the special symbol stops. The special symbol winning / failing determination means 141 holds a special symbol winning / failing lottery table that is referred to at the time of this winning / failing determination.

Here, FIG. 72 is a diagram schematically showing a special symbol winning / failing lottery table, in which (A) is a table referred to in a normal state (low probability state), and (B) is a probability variation state (high probability state). This is the referenced table. In this special symbol winning / failing lottery table, a random value per special symbol and a judgment result of a big hit, a small hit, and a loss are associated with each other, and the probability of winning or losing the big hit and the small hit according to the associated range setting. Is decided. As can be seen from FIG. 72, in the winning / failing lottery of the special symbol game, in the normal state (low probability state), the big hit is obtained only when the random number value falls in the range of 0 to 163. On the other hand, in the probability variation state (high probability state), the jackpot range is expanded, and the jackpot is obtained not only when the random number value corresponds to the range of 0 to 163 but also when it corresponds to the range of 164 to 1639. That is, when the probability variation function of the special symbol is activated, the jackpot lottery probability changes from the low probability state (164/65536) to the high probability state (1640/65536). In this way, the range corresponding to the big hit changes according to the game state, but the probability of winning the big hit is the same in the winning / failing lottery of the first special symbol and the winning / failing lottery of the second special symbol. Here, even if the random number value per special symbol does not fall within the range of the big hit, if it falls within the predetermined range, it becomes a small hit. In this example, the winning / failing lottery of the first special symbol has a higher probability of winning a small hit than the winning / failing lottery of the second special symbol. In addition, for example, in the winning / failing lottery of the second special symbol, it may be configured so that there is no small hit.

The special symbol stop symbol determining means 142 determines the stop symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the symbol group to which the stop symbol belongs, based on the result of the winning / failing lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. To do. When the result of the winning / failing lottery is a big hit, the special symbol stop symbol determining means 142 is referred to when determining the stop symbol and the symbol group of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the first special symbol per symbol table and It has a symbol table for the second special symbol.

FIG. 73 (A) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a symbol table per first special symbol. In this first special symbol per symbol table, for the special symbol per symbol random value, the stop symbol, the symbol group, the contents of the jackpot (the number of operations of the special symbol probability fluctuation function and the fluctuation time shortening function, the large winning opening 64) Operation patterns) are associated with each other. In this table, the stop symbols "2" to "11" of the first special symbol are classified into three types of symbol groups A to C according to the type of jackpot.

Specifically, in the symbols "2", "3", "4", and "5", the symbol group A (12R specific time-saving symbol 1) is the symbol "6", "7", "8", The symbol group B (2R specific time-saving symbol) is associated with "9", and the symbol group C (12R normal time-saving symbol) is associated with the symbols "10" and "11". The "specific symbol" is a symbol that activates the probability variation function after the end of the special game, and the "normal symbol" is a symbol that does not activate the probability variation function after the end of the special game (described later). The same applies to the symbol group of the second special symbol).

The symbol group A is a specific symbol indicating a so-called "probability change hit" that shifts the game state after the end of the special game to the probability change state (high probability state) of the special symbol, and has a probability fluctuation function of the special symbol until the next big hit occurs. And the function to shorten the fluctuation time and the electric chew support function are added. The specified number of rounds of the special game is 12 rounds, and the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 64 in one round game is about 30 seconds.

The symbol group B shifts the game state after the end of the special game to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol, although the number of times the large winning opening 64 is opened and the opening time are different from the above-mentioned "probability change hit". , A specific symbol indicating a so-called "sudden probability change hit", and a probability fluctuation function and a fluctuation time shortening function of a special symbol, and an electric chew support function are provided until the next big hit occurs. The specified number of rounds of the special game is two rounds, and the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 64 in one round game is about 0.05 seconds.

The symbol group C is a normal symbol indicating a so-called "normal hit" that shifts the game state after the end of the special game to the normal state (low probability state), and is a predetermined number of times after the end of the special game (50 times in this example). The function of shortening the fluctuation time of the special symbol and the function of supporting the electric chew are given only to the above. The specified number of rounds of the special game is 12 rounds, and the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 64 in one round game is about 30 seconds.

On the other hand, when the result of the winning / failing lottery is a small hit, the symbol "12" is uniquely assigned as the stop symbol by omitting the symbol determination by the random number per special symbol. A symbol group G (special electric operation symbol) is associated with the symbol "12". In the case of a small hit, the game state (probability fluctuation function, fluctuation time shortening function, electric chew support function) is not changed, and the game state is maintained before and after the winning / losing lottery. If the result of the winning / failing lottery is incorrect, the symbol "1" is uniquely assigned as the stop symbol.

Subsequently, FIG. 73 (B) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a symbol table per second special symbol. In this second special symbol per symbol table, for the special symbol per symbol random value, the stop symbol, the symbol group, the contents of the jackpot (the number of operations of the special symbol probability fluctuation function and the fluctuation time shortening function, the large winning opening 64) Operation patterns) are associated with each other. In this table, the second
The stop symbols "13" to "22" of the special symbol are classified into three types of symbol groups D to F according to the type of jackpot. Specifically, the symbol group D (16R specific time-saving symbol) is for the symbols "13", "14", "15", and "16", and the symbol group E is for the symbols "17" and "18". (2R specific time saving symbol), and symbol group F (2R normal time saving symbol) is associated with each of the symbols "19", "20", "21", and "22".

The symbol group D is a specific symbol indicating a so-called "probability change hit" that shifts the game state after the end of the special game to the probability change state (high probability state) of the special symbol, and the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol until the next big hit occurs. And the function to shorten the fluctuation time and the electric chew support function are added. The specified number of rounds of the special game is 16 rounds, and the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 64 in one round game is about 30 seconds.

The symbol group E shifts the game state after the end of the special game to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol, although the number of times the large winning opening 64 is opened and the opening time are different from the above-mentioned "probability change hit". , A specific symbol indicating a so-called "sudden probability change hit", and a probability fluctuation function and a fluctuation time shortening function of a special symbol, and an electric chew support function are provided until the next big hit occurs. The specified number of rounds of the special game is two rounds, and the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 64 in one round game is about 0.05 seconds.

The symbol group F is a normal symbol indicating a so-called "normal hit" that shifts the game state after the end of the special game to the normal state (low probability state), and is a predetermined number of times after the end of the special game (50 times in this example). Limited to only, the function to shorten the fluctuation time of the special symbol and the electric chew support function are given. The specified number of rounds of the special game is two rounds, and the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 64 in one round game is about 0.05 seconds.

On the other hand, when the result of the winning / failing lottery is a small hit, the symbol "23" is uniquely assigned as the stop symbol by omitting the symbol determination by the random number per special symbol. A symbol group H (special electric operation symbol) is associated with the symbol "23". In the case of a small hit, it does not trigger a change in the game state (probability fluctuation function, fluctuation time shortening function, electric chew support function), and the game state is maintained before and after the winning / losing lottery (each function). (Except when a small hit is won when the fluctuation is the end of operation). If the result of the winning / failing lottery is incorrect, the symbol "1" is uniquely assigned as the stop symbol.

Here, when the result of the winning / losing lottery is a big hit, the game state control means 165 determines the game state after the special game based on the type of the symbol group related to the big hit, and determines the game state after the special game. Switch. As this game state, the time saving state and the electric chew support state of the special symbol are continued until the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of end condition times, for example, 50 times, counting from the end time of the special game. However, if the special symbol shifts to the probabilistic state at the same time, the time saving state and the electric chew support state of the special symbol are also continued as long as the probabilistic state continues. That is, the probabilistic state of the special symbol is continued until the next big hit. At this time, in the probability variation state of the special symbol, the lottery probability of the big hit is changed from the normal low probability to the high probability, and the high probability state is more advantageous than the normal game state. In the time saving state of the special symbol, the average fluctuation time of the special symbol is shortened. In the electric chew support state (easy entry state), the probability fluctuation function of the normal symbol, the fluctuation time shortening function of the normal symbol, and the opening time extension function of the normal electric accessory are activated to enter the second starting port 65. It is in a state where the ease of entering the ball is enhanced. When the probability fluctuation function of the normal symbol is activated, the winning probability of the normal symbol is increased from the normal state. When the function for shortening the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is activated, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened. When the opening time extension function of the ordinary electric accessory 67 is activated, the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 67 is extended from the normal state.

Further, the game state control means 165 is a special game based on the types of symbol groups A to G (symbol group G is a symbol group related to a small hit (not shown)) when the result of the winning / losing lottery is a big hit or a small hit. The later variation pattern selection state is determined, and the variation pattern selection state after the special game is switched. The variation pattern selection state is one of the conditions referred to when selecting the variation pattern table described later. The switching time of the variable pattern selection state is the end of the special game or the end of the variable pattern selection state. In the present embodiment, the variation pattern selection state includes a normal variation pattern selection state, a probability variation variation pattern selection state, a time saving variation pattern selection state, and the like. Here, the normal variation pattern selection state is a state in which the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined by referring to the normal variation pattern table selected when the gaming state is the normal state. The probability variation variation pattern selection state is a state in which the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined with reference to the probability variation variation pattern table selected when the game state is the probability variation state of the special symbol. The time-saving variation pattern selection state is a state in which the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined with reference to the time-saving variation pattern table selected when the game state is the time-saving state of the special symbol. The game state control means 165 generates an effect control command (referred to as a “game state designation command”) including the current game state information and the variation pattern selection state information, and stores the command in the main information storage means 180. Store in the area.

The special symbol variation pattern determining means 143 determines the variation pattern of the special symbol based on the special symbol variation pattern random value. Here, the special symbol variation pattern determining means 143 holds a plurality of types of variation pattern tables that are referred to when selecting a variation pattern of the special symbol. The special symbol variation pattern determining means 143 selects any variation pattern table from a plurality of types of variation pattern tables based on the current variation pattern selection state and the result of the winning / failing lottery.

FIG. 74 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a variation pattern table of a special symbol. Here, (A1) and (A2) in the figure are normal fluctuation pattern tables, (B1) and (B2) in the figure are probabilistic fluctuation pattern tables, and (C1) and (C2) in the figure are time-saving fluctuation pattern tables. Is. In each fluctuation pattern table, a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns are defined. In each figure, "selectivity" is shown for convenience of explanation, but in reality, a judgment value (range of random values) for determining the fluctuation pattern is set according to the special symbol fluctuation pattern random value. The fluctuation pattern is determined based on which determination value the fluctuation pattern random value belongs to. For each variation pattern, the variation time is set for each variation pattern as the end condition of the symbol variation, and it is premised that the symbol variation by the decorative symbol composed of a plurality of symbols is also executed at the variation time. Is defined as. Specifically, the fluctuation patterns P1 and P2 each have a fluctuation time of 5 seconds and 10 seconds, and can take a non-reach fluctuation mode as the fluctuation process of the symbol. The fluctuation patterns P3 and P4 have fluctuation times of 20 seconds and 40 seconds, respectively, and can take a fluctuation mode of normal reach (N reach) as a fluctuation process of the symbol. The fluctuation patterns P5 and P6 have fluctuation times of 60 seconds and 90 seconds, respectively, and can take a fluctuation mode with reach as a fluctuation process of the symbol, and finally develop into super reach (SP reach). Here, in any of the fluctuation pattern tables, when the result of the winning / failing lottery is a big hit, the non-reach fluctuation patterns P1 and P2 are not selected, and only the reach fluctuation patterns P3 to P6 are selected. To. On the other hand, when the result of the winning / failing lottery is wrong, the selection rate of the non-reach fluctuation patterns P1 and P2 is relatively high. Here, the selectivity of the non-reach variation pattern P1 (variation time: 5 seconds) is relative in the probability variation variation pattern table for detachment and the time reduction variation pattern table for detachment as compared with the normal variation pattern table for detachment. The average fluctuation time tends to be shortened in that it is higher. In this example, for convenience of explanation, only a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns will be described as an example, but there are actually 100 or more types of fluctuation patterns.

Further, in the above-mentioned explanation, the fluctuation pattern table for losing is expressed by a single table in each case, but when the result of the winning / losing lottery is lost, the number of balls on hold for operation of the special symbol ( Different variation pattern tables may be selected depending on 0 to 4). That is, by using a fluctuation pattern table according to the number of operation-holding balls of the special symbol, the ratio of selecting a relatively short fluctuation time increases as the number of operation-holding balls increases, and conversely, the number of operation-holding balls decreases. The proportion of relatively long fluctuation times selected can be increased. On the other hand, when the result of the winning / failing lottery is a big hit, by using a variable pattern table according to the symbol or the symbol group related to the big hit, the expectation of the big hit is raised in a dramatic manner according to the type of the big hit. It may be possible to make the rate at which the variation time is selected different.

Further, since the special symbol variation pattern determining means 143 instructs the effect control board 200 to start the variation of the decorative symbol after selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol, communication with the effect control board 200 is normally performed. An effect control command (referred to as a "communication inspection command") for confirming whether or not the command is used, and an effect control command ("variable additional symbol information specification command") including variable additional symbol information (information for adding or subtracting the variable time). ), An effect control command including variation pattern information (referred to as "variation pattern specification command"), a "character effect number specification command" including character effect number information (design group and game state information), and the like are generated. (Hereinafter, these commands are collectively referred to as "variation start command"), and this is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180.

The normal symbol lottery processing means 145 includes a normal symbol winning / failing determination means 146, a normal symbol stop symbol determination means 147, and a normal symbol variation pattern determination means 148. When the fluctuation start condition of the normal symbol is satisfied, the normal symbol lottery processing means 145 reads out the random value per normal symbol and the normal symbol fluctuation pattern random value stored in the earliest storage area in the normal symbol hold storage area. It is stored in the normal symbol hit / miss determination area and the normal symbol variation pattern determination area of the main information storage means 180, respectively.

The normal symbol hit / fail determination means 146 reads a random value per normal symbol from the normal symbol hit / fail determination area of the main information storage means 180, executes a hit / fail judgment, and determines whether the determination result corresponds to hit or miss. decide. The result of this winning / failing lottery is temporarily stored in the normal symbol determination flag of the main information storage means 180, used in the subsequent processing, and then cleared when the fluctuation of the normal symbol is stopped. The ordinary symbol winning / failing determination means 146 holds the ordinary symbol winning / failing lottery table referred to at the time of this winning / failing lottery, and in the normal state (low probability state), for example, the normal symbol winning / failing determination means has a probability of "160/283". Refer to the symbol winning / failing lottery table, and in the probability variation state (high probability state) of the ordinary symbol, for example, refer to the ordinary symbol winning / failing lottery table that wins with a probability of "282/283" and execute the winning / failing lottery of the ordinary symbol. To do.

The normal symbol stop symbol determining means 147 refers to the symbol lottery table and assigns a predetermined winning symbol when the result of the winning / failing lottery is a hit, while assigning a predetermined missing symbol when the result is a miss. It has become.

The normal symbol variation pattern determining means 148 reads the ordinary symbol variation pattern random value from the ordinary symbol variation pattern determination area of the main information storage means 180, and also refers to the ordinary symbol variation pattern table to display the variation of the ordinary symbol in the normal state. In, a relatively long fluctuation time is selected (for example, seven types of "4 seconds, 5 seconds, 6 seconds, 7 seconds, 8 seconds, 9 seconds, and 10 seconds" are uniformly selected). On the other hand, in the time saving state (easy ball entry state) of the normal symbol, a relatively short fluctuation time (for example, "0.5 seconds") is selected.

When the result of the winning / losing lottery is a big hit, the demo effect setting means 150 displays the big hit start demo effect and the big hit end demo displayed on the effect display device 95 or the like during the special game according to the type of the determined symbol group. Determine the demo production time related to the production. In addition, the demo production setting means 150
Is a production control command (“big hit start demo command”) that instructs the execution of the jackpot start demo production and a production control command (“big hit end demo command”) that instructs the execution of the jackpot end demo production as the demo setting process of the special game. ") Is generated.

Further, when the result of the winning / failing lottery is a small hit, the demo production time setting means 150 has a demo production time related to the small hit start demo effect and the small hit end demo effect displayed on the effect display device 95 or the like during the small hit game. To determine. Further, the demo effect setting means 150 executes an effect control command (“small hit start demo command”) for instructing the execution of the small hit start demo effect and the execution of the small hit end demo effect as the demo setting process of the small hit game. Generate an instruction control command (“small hit end demo command”).

The symbol display control means 155 includes a special symbol display control means 156 and a normal symbol display control means 157. The special symbol display control means 156 causes the first special symbol display device 81 to variably display the first special symbol according to the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol, and confirms and displays the first special symbol after the fluctuation display. Let me. Further, the special symbol display control means 156 causes the second special symbol display device 82 to variably display the second special symbol according to the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol, and displays the second special symbol after the fluctuation display. Confirm display. The special symbol display control means 156 has a special symbol game timer for managing the time (variable time, fixed display time) related to the display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The operating states of the first special symbol display device 81 and the second special symbol display device 82 are monitored based on the special symbol game status of the main information storage means 180. The special symbol display control means 156 requests the effect control board 200 to confirm the decorative symbol when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped (that is, at the timing when the value of the special symbol game timer becomes "0"). Generates an effect control command (referred to as "fluctuation stop command"). The normal symbol display control means 157 causes the normal symbol display device 85 to variably display the normal symbol according to the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the normal symbol, and confirms and displays the normal symbol after the fluctuation display. The normal symbol display control means 157 has a normal symbol game timer for managing the time (variable time, fixed display time) related to the display of the normal symbol. The operating state of the normal symbol display device 85 is monitored based on the normal symbol game status of the main information storage means 180.

When the result of the winning / failing lottery of the special symbol is a big hit, the electric accessory control means 160 outputs a control signal to the special electric accessory solenoid 78 as a special game process after the confirmation display of the special symbol is performed, and the electric accessory control means 160 outputs a control signal to the special electric accessory solenoid 78. The object 77 is opened according to a predetermined operation pattern. In the special game, one opening / closing operation of the special electric accessory 77 is regarded as one round game, and the round game is continuously executed for a specified number of rounds (2R, 12R, 16R in this example). .. Here, when the jackpot type is a so-called 12R jackpot (symbol group A, C) or 16R jackpot (symbol group D), the jackpot is opened for a maximum of about 30 seconds in one round game. On the other hand, when the jackpot type is a so-called 2R jackpot (symbol groups B, E, F), the jackpot is opened for a maximum of about 0.05 seconds in one round game.

Further, when the result of the winning / failing lottery of the special symbol is a small hit, the electric accessory control means 160 outputs a control signal to the special electric accessory solenoid 78 as a small hit game process after the confirmation display of the special symbol. , The special electric accessory 77 is opened for a short period of time. The small hit game is distinguished from the special game consisting of a plurality of round games in that it is composed of one round game. Here, when the above-mentioned 2R special game and the small hit game are compared, although they are internally different, one opening / closing time (0.05 seconds) is the same and the number of opening / closing times is the same (the former is). Since one opening and closing per round is common to two rounds of two rounds, and the latter is common to two opening and closing times per round (two times of one round), a game with an apparently similar opening time and opening pattern is developed.

Further, when the electric accessory control means 160 wins the winning / losing lottery of the ordinary symbol, the electric accessory control means 160 outputs a control signal to the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 68 to open the ordinary electric accessory 67 for a predetermined opening time. Here, the electric accessory control means 160 opens the normal electric accessory 67 for a very short time (for example, 0.2 seconds) in the normal state, whereas the electric accessory control means 160 is normally electric in the easy ball entry state (electric chew support state). The accessory 67 is opened for a relatively long time (for example, 4 seconds) as compared with the normal state.

The error monitoring control means 170 monitors the input information of the I / O port circuit 104, and inspects the magnetic detection signal by the magnetic sensor, the disconnection short circuit power supply abnormality signal, the radio wave detection signal by the radio wave sensor, the door / frame opening signal, and the like. , Determine whether the gaming machine is in an error state. In the case of an error state, an effect control command (“error effect designation command”) including the error information is requested to the effect control board 200 in order to indicate the error state effect. Although the description is omitted in FIG. 70, the door opening switch is a means for detecting whether or not the glass frame 5 is open, and the frame opening switch is a means for detecting whether or not the front frame 2 is open. The back set release switch is a means for detecting whether or not the back mechanism board 30 is open. Further, the magnetic sensor and the radio wave sensor are detection means for detecting so-called goto behavior.

The main information storage means 180 has acquired random number value information, information on the game state (probability change state, time saving state, easy entry state) related to the special symbol game and the normal symbol game, information on the variable pattern selection state, and result information of the winning / failing lottery. (Hit, small hit, miss), information on stop symbols and fluctuation patterns related to special symbols and ordinary symbols, information on special games (number of rounds, opening time, opening mode (number of opening times per round game), etc.), special It is configured to temporarily store status information indicating the operating status of the symbol display devices 71 and 72, status information indicating the operating status of the special electric accessory 77, information on the effect control command data, and the like, and stores each information. It has a predetermined storage area for.

When a command transmission request is made, the command transmission / reception means 190 is configured to transmit various effect control command data stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 to the effect control board 200 by a parallel transmission method. Has been done. Each effect control command has a 2-byte configuration including 1-byte MODE data and 1-byte EVENT data, and in order to distinguish MODE and EVENT, Bit7 of the MOD data is "1". Bit7 of EVENT data is set to "0". When this information is transmitted as valid, a strobe signal is output for each of MODE and EVENT. As a general rule, the effect control command generated in each process is transmitted as one command for each interrupt cycle according to the order set in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180.

<< Production control board >>
As shown in FIG. 71, the effect control board 200 includes the effect lottery random number generation means 210, the effect control means 220, the lamp control means 230, the accessory control means 240, the error effect control means 250, the sub-main information storage means 260, and the command. The transmission / reception means 270 is included. Each of the above-mentioned means on the effect control board 200 is composed of hardware such as a sub-main CPU 201, ROM 202, RAM 203, and an electronic circuit arranged on the effect control board 200, and software such as a control program stored in the ROM 202. It is a functional representation of something.

The effect lottery random number generation means 210 includes a random number counter for generating various software random numbers (effect lottery random numbers) by the program processing of the sub-main CPU 201. These random number counters play a role as random number generation means for generating random numbers by software. The software random numbers include a look-ahead notice lottery random number to be used for a lottery for a look-ahead notice effect, a look-ahead notice pattern random number to be used for selecting a look-ahead notice pattern, a decorative symbol random number to be used for selecting a decorative symbol stop symbol, and a decorative symbol. The variation effect pattern random number used for selecting the variation effect pattern of the above, the advance notice effect pattern random number used for selecting the advance notice effect pattern, and the like are included. These random numbers are updated by using the remaining time when the command analysis is not performed in the main process on the effect control side, which will be described later.

The effect controlling means 220 includes an effect mode control means 221, a hold information display control means 222, a look-ahead notice control means 223, a decorative symbol determination means 224, a variable effect determination means 225, a notice effect determination means 226, and a jackpot effect determination means 227. Including.

The effect mode control means 221 controls the transition of the effect mode in a manner consistent with the game state and the variation pattern selection state managed on the main control board 100 side based on the game state designation command from the main control board 100. To execute. In the present embodiment, the three types of effect modes include a normal effect mode, a probabilistic effect mode, and a time saving effect mode. The effect display device 95 displays an effect mode notification image (in this example, a background image that is displayed on the back of the decorative pattern) corresponding to the effect mode during the current stay, and the background images are different from each other for each effect mode. Since it is set, the player can recognize which of the production modes he / she is currently staying in from the type of background image.

The hold information display control means 222 has a first hold ball number counter for counting the number of operation hold balls of the first special symbol, a second hold ball number counter for counting the number of operation hold balls of the second special symbol, and the like. have. When the hold information display control means 222 receives the symbol storage number command from the main control board 100, the hold information display control means 222 receives the symbol storage number command, and based on the operation hold ball number information included in the symbol storage number command, the first hold ball number counter and the second hold ball number counter and the second hold ball. Update the value of the number counter. Further, the hold information display control means 222 causes the hold display units 701 and 702 of the effect display device 95 to operate the hold ball of the first special symbol based on the values of the first hold ball number counter and the second hold ball number counter. Control is performed to display the number of hold images corresponding to the number and the number of hold images corresponding to the number of operation hold balls of the second special symbol. In the normal display mode, a white-displayed hold image is displayed when the operation hold ball of the special symbol is generated, while the hold change look-ahead notice effect described below is subject to the look-ahead notice. The reserved image is changed from a normal display mode (white) to a special display mode (blue → green → purple → red, etc. depending on the jackpot expectation).

The look-ahead notice control means 223 determines whether or not to execute the look-ahead notice effect by lottery, triggered by receiving the pre-determination command from the main control board 100. The look-ahead notice control means 223 temporarily stores the information (look-ahead information) of the pre-judgment result included in the pre-judgment command in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 in a form of being combined with the entry order of the operation-holding ball. .. The look-ahead notice effect is generated as an aspect of a so-called continuous notice effect that announces the possibility of winning a big hit or generating a reach effect over a continuous plurality of variable displays of the decorative symbol. When it is determined that the pre-reading notice effect (continuous notice effect) can be executed, the information of the pre-judgment command from the main control board 100 (result of the pre-judgment) and the information of the symbol storage number command (the number of existing operation hold balls) are displayed. After analysis, a look-ahead notice effect pattern over a continuous plurality of variable displays is determined by lottery for the operation hold ball (referred to as "trigger hold") that triggers the occurrence of the look-ahead notice effect this time. There are various variations of the look-ahead notice effect, such as a hold change look-ahead notice effect, a chance look-ahead notice effect, and a background change look-ahead notice effect.

The decorative symbol determining means 224 is a combination of the final stop symbols of the decorative symbols (left symbol, middle symbol, and so on) based on the information (variation pattern information, character effect number information) included in the variation start command from the main control board 100. The design on the left) will be decided by lottery. In this example, three symbol rows including a plurality of types of decorative symbols are configured. This decorative pattern is formed by, for example, an identification element consisting of numbers or letters. In this example, a total of 12 types such as numbers "1" to "9" and letters "A", "B", and "C" are set as identification elements. Each decorative symbol has each display area Z1, Z2 in the order of "1"->"2"->"3"->...->"9"->"A"->"B"->"C" according to the arrangement of the symbol rows. The patrol is displayed on Z3. In this example, as a combination of stop symbols of decorative symbols (left symbol, middle symbol, right symbol), even-numbered decorative symbols are treated as non-probable variable symbols that normally cause jackpots, while odd-numbered and character decorative symbols are probabilistic jackpots. Treat as a probabilistic symbol.

Further, the decorative symbol determination means 224 holds a plurality of types of stop symbol pattern tables that are referred to when a combination of stop symbols of decorative symbols (also referred to as “stop symbol pattern”) is determined by lottery. Examples of the plurality of types of tables include a stop symbol pattern table for large hits, a stop symbol pattern table for small hits, a stop symbol pattern table for loss of reach, and a stop symbol pattern table for non-reach loss. The stop symbol of the decorative symbol is formed as a combination of three symbols, for example, when the result of the winning / failing lottery corresponds to a big hit, a specific combination, for example, "7,7,7" or "1.1.1". As shown above, a combination in which the three symbols are aligned is selected. When the lottery result is a 2R big hit or a small hit, a specific combination, for example, a predetermined combination such as "3, 5, 7" is selected. That is, the specific combination of the 2R big hit and the small hit does not necessarily have to be a combination of three symbols. If the lottery result is out of reach, only the middle symbol is numbered back and forth while the left symbol and the right symbol match, for example, "3, 4, 3" and "7, 5, 7". A combination with a frame shift is selected. In addition, in the case of a small hit or a 2R big hit, the above-mentioned reach-off mode may be used. On the other hand, when the lottery result is out of reach, a combination (so-called disparity) in which the three symbols are not aligned, such as “3.1.2” and “9 ・ 4 ・ 6”, is selected. In addition, when the lottery result is out of reach, a specific roll called a so-called "chance roll" may be selected. Further, when the effect of temporarily stopping the final stop symbol as described above is performed before the final stop symbol is confirmed and displayed, the temporary stop symbol is selected.

The variation effect determining means 225 defines a variation process (effect process) from the start to stop of the variation in the variation display of the decorative symbol based on the information (variation pattern information) included in the variation start command from the main control board 100. Determine the production pattern. The variation effect determining means 225 holds a plurality of types of variation effect pattern tables that are referred to when selecting the variation effect pattern, and the variation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol from the plurality of types of variation effect pattern tables. ) Corresponds to the variable effect pattern table. In the variation effect pattern table, the variation effect pattern random value and the variation effect pattern are associated with each other according to the result (that is, reach type) of the variation pattern lottery of the special symbol. Here, while the basic pattern of symbol variation (for example, "N reach A", "SP reach A", etc.) is determined as the variation pattern on the main control board 100 side, as the variation effect pattern on the effect control board 200 side. Based on the basic pattern, a detailed pattern of symbol variation (for example, "N reach A1, A2, A3", "SP reach A1, A2, A3, A4", etc.) that defines a scenario of the effect display process in detail is determined. In this way, the variation effect pattern of the decorative symbol defines a variation display mode of the decorative pattern, that is, a scenario of a series of effect display processes from the start of the variation of the decorative symbol to the end of the variation, and each of the scenarios in the display process. The timing for generating the notice effect at the stage is also defined as the time schedule. The stop order for stopping the decorative symbols is predetermined for each variation effect pattern, and in the present embodiment, in principle, the decorative symbols are stopped in the order of left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol. However, in the case of a variation effect pattern with a short variation time, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are stopped almost at the same time, and in the case of a specific variation effect pattern, the left symbol → the middle symbol → the right symbol are in this order. It can also be stopped. At this time, if the stop order is not the above-mentioned principle (left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol), the jackpot expectation tends to be relatively high.

The advance notice effect determination means 226 determines the advance notice effect pattern that defines the content of the advance notice effect to be executed at each stage of the change process of the decorative symbol according to the scenario of the variation effect pattern described above. The advance notice effect pattern includes an effect pattern for temporarily or stepwise displaying an image of a specific character or motif, an animation, or the like, an effect pattern for outputting a specific sound, an effect pattern for operating an effect device, and the like. .. The notice effect is executed in parallel with the variable display of the decorative symbol, and suggests that the jackpot reliability is high, in which the symbol variation stops in the jackpot mode. The notice effect includes a notice effect that is executed before the reach state occurs (including the time when the reach occurs) in the process of changing the decorative symbol, and a notice effect that is executed after the reach state occurs. Each notice effect has a different jackpot reliability, and basically, the notice effect displayed after the reach occurs has a relatively higher jackpot reliability than the notice effect displayed before the reach occurs. It has become. The advance notice effect determination means 226 holds the advance notice effect pattern table referred to when selecting the advance notice effect pattern for each type of advance notice effect, and corresponds to the type of advance notice effect generated according to the scenario of the variable effect pattern. The notice production pattern table is selected. The advance notice effect determination means 226 refers to the advance notice effect pattern table selected above, and is selected from a plurality of types of advance notice effect patterns by lottery based on the advance notice effect pattern random number value acquired from the effect lottery random number generation means 210. Select one. Specific types of advance notice effect patterns include comment advance notice effect patterns, background advance notice effect patterns, SU (step-up) advance notice effect patterns, group advance notice effect patterns, cut-in advance notice effect patterns, and character movable advance notice effect patterns. Etc. are prepared. This advance notice effect is basically performed by synthesizing the display of one or a plurality of advance notice effects with the variable display of the decorative symbol on the effect display device 95. Therefore, even if the decorative pattern is variablely displayed by the same variable effect pattern, it is possible to generate various effect modes by combining with one or a plurality of advance notice effects.

The jackpot effect determining means 227 is based on the demo time information of the jackpot effect from the main control board 100, and the special game effect including the jackpot start demo and the jackpot end demo displayed during the special game prior to the execution of the special game ( Determine the content of the jackpot game production). Further, when the jackpot effect determining means 227 receives the hit start demo effect command or the hit end demo effect command from the main control board 100, the hit start demo effect and the hit start demo effect on the effect display device 95 are performed according to the determined contents of the special game effect. Control the production process of the hit end demo production.

As described above, the effect controlling means 220 generates an image control command related to an image and sound based on the determined effect content (variable effect pattern, notice effect pattern, stop symbol pattern, etc.), and uses this as the sub-main information storage means 260. Store in the command storage area of.

The lamp effect control means 230 controls the lighting of the effect lamp, the emission color, and the like according to the effect content set by the effect control means 220. The lamp effect control means 230 holds a plurality of types of lamp data (lamp pattern data) for controlling the lighting of the effect lamp LP (frame lamp 10, panel lamp 25), and the lamp corresponding to the determined effect pattern. The data is read out and this lamp control signal (lamp data) is transmitted to the lamp connection board 291.

The accessory effect control means 240 controls the drive of each effect device according to the effect content set by the effect control means 220. The accessory effect control means 240 holds a plurality of types of drive data for driving and controlling the effect device, and transmits a drive control signal (drive data) corresponding to the determined effect pattern to the motor driver 292.

The error effect control means 250 is configured to determine an error effect pattern when an error effect designation command is received from the main control board 100, and notify the gaming machine that an error state has occurred according to the error effect pattern. There is.

The sub-main information storage means 260 is configured to temporarily store decorative symbol information, variable effect pattern information, notice effect pattern information, control command information, and the like, and is a predetermined device for storing each information. It has a storage area. For example, in the command storage area, an effect control command buffer for storing an effect control command from the main control board 100, an image control command buffer for storing an image control command to the image control board 300, and an image control board 300. Contains an ACK command buffer for storing ACK commands from. Each command buffer is composed of a ring buffer, and can store a predetermined number of effect control commands, image control commands, and ACK commands.

The command transmission / reception means 270 is configured to receive the effect control command transmitted from the main control board 100 and store the effect control command in the effect control command buffer. The command transmission / reception means 270 generates an interrupt based on the input of the above-mentioned strobe signal from the main control board 100, executes reception interrupt processing (details will be described later) of the effect control command, and executes various effect control commands in this interrupt process. It is supposed to get. When the command transmission / reception means 270 receives the strobe signal, the command transmission / reception means 270 preferentially performs the reception interrupt processing of this effect control command over other interrupt processing (interrupt processing of priority level 7 or less, which will be described later). ing.

Further, the command transmission / reception means 270 is stored in the sub-main information storage means 260 in order to indicate the execution of the effect contents (variable effect pattern information, notice effect pattern information, decorative pattern information, etc.) set by the effect control means 220. The transmitted image control command is transmitted to the image control board 300 by the serial communication method. As a general rule, the image control command is transmitted every predetermined cycle (500 μs in this example) according to the order set in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260. As a result, the image control board 300 analyzes various image control commands transmitted from the effect control board 200, and causes the effect display device 95 to variably display the effect image including the decorative pattern according to the scenario of the variation effect pattern. , The notice effect is displayed in a form superimposed on the effect of the symbol variation at each stage of the variation display process. Further, the command transmission / reception means 270 receives the ACK command transmitted from the image control board 300 and stores the ACK command in the ACK command buffer.

[Processing on the main control board side]
Next, the procedure of the operation processing on the main control board 100 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 75 to 89. The processing on the main control board 100 side includes a main control side main processing and a main control side timer interrupt processing.

<< Main processing on the main control side >>
75 to 76 are flowcharts showing main processing on the main control side of the main control board 100. In this main control side main process, after the security check of the main CPU 101 is performed by resetting when the power is turned on, the program is started and the processes after S1 are started.

First, as the initial setting required when the power is turned on, the start address is set in the stack pointer as the initial value of the stack area (S1), and the access permission of the RAM 103 is granted (S2). Subsequently, a vector table in which the start address of the program to be processed when a timer interrupt occurs is set (S3), and an initial value is set in the internal register of the main CPU 101 (S4).

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear switch is turned on (S5). When the RAM clear switch is turned on (S5: YES), the entire area of the RAM 103 is cleared to zero in S9, which will be described later. On the other hand, when the RAM clear switch is not turned on (S5: NO), the value of the power off information flag is read to determine whether or not the power off normal information is stored (S6).

Here, when the information on the normal power failure is stored (S6: YES), the checksum is calculated for the predetermined area of the RAM 103 (S7). Then, it is determined whether or not this checksum is 0, that is, whether or not the checksum is normal (S8). Note that the checksum at power-on calculated here includes the complement of the checksum calculated in the power-off process described later, so if it is backed up normally, the checksum at power-on will be checked. Sam becomes "0". In this way, it is determined at the time of turning on the power whether or not the information stored in the RAM 103 before the power is turned off is correctly backed up. At this time, if the checksum is normal (S8: YES), the process proceeds to S12, which will be described later, in order to return to the state before the power was turned off. On the other hand, when the checksum is abnormal (S8: NO), the entire area of the RAM 103 is cleared to zero (S9). Next, the initialization data at the time of turning on the power is set in the RAM 103 (S10). Subsequently, in order to initialize the effect display device 95, initialize the effect lamp LP, and the like, an effect control command (“effect initial command”) to the effect control board 200 is requested (S11).

Next, in the power-off / recovery setting process, the power-on normal information is set, various errors are initially set, and the communication with the payout control board 400 is initially set in the RAM 103 (S12). Here, as the setting of the power-on normal information, in order to save that the power-on was performed correctly, the power-on normal data is stored in the power-off information flag, and the information of the power-off occurrence is initialized. Turn off the power off confirmation flag. Next, the data transfer source address, the data transfer destination address, and the number of transfer bytes are set, and the data corresponding to the number of transfer bytes is transferred (S13). Then, the value of the special symbol game status at the time of power off is read, and the power off / return process related to the special symbol game is performed (S14).

Subsequently, a transmission request for an effect control command (“power off / return command”) at the time of power failure / recovery between the main control board 100 and the effect control board 200 is performed (S15). This power off / return command includes information on the communication line inspection, the operating state of the special symbol, the number of probability fluctuations, the number of time reductions, the number of easy entry states, the fluctuation pattern selection state, and the error state. The untransmitted command request before the power is turned off is cleared. Next, in the symbol storage number command request processing, the information on the number of operation-holding balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol when the power is turned off is read, and an effect control command including the information on the number of operation-holding balls is requested ( S16).

Subsequently, a return setting is performed to return the normal electric accessory 67 to the state before the power is turned off (for example, the second start port 65 is in the open state) (S17). Further, a return setting is made to return the special electric accessory 77 to the state before the power is turned off (for example, the large winning opening 64 is in the open state) (S18). Subsequently, the value of the special symbol mode flag is read, and the operating state of the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol when the power is turned off is set (S19). The special symbol mode flag is a flag for setting the operation probability (high probability or low probability) of the special symbol game. Next, in order to activate the timer interrupt, a predetermined count value is set as the initial setting of the CTC circuit of the main control microcomputer 110, and the timer interrupt is generated every 4 ms (S20). Subsequently, interrupt prohibition is set to prohibit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing (S21). Then, the clear word 1 (“55H”) is set in preparation for restarting the watchdog timer (S22).

Next, in order to determine the occurrence of the power outage, the value of the power outage confirmation flag is read, and it is determined whether or not the power outage has occurred (S23). If the power is not cut off, the initial value random number update process is executed (S24). In this initial value random number update process, in this initial value random number update process, the initial value random number per normal symbol, the soft initial value random number per special symbol, and the symbol initial value random number per special symbol are updated. Specifically, the numerical value of each counter is added by 1, and when the numerical value exceeds the maximum value, it is returned to the minimum value "0".

Next, interrupt permission is set to allow the occurrence of timer interrupt processing (S25), the process returns to the above-mentioned interrupt prohibition processing (S21), and the loop processing of S21 to S25 is repeatedly executed. Here, the timer interrupt processing is periodically executed at predetermined intervals, but the remaining time between the completion of the previous interrupt processing and the occurrence of the next interrupt processing is used to utilize the remaining time from S21 to S25. Repeat the process up to. Then, when an interrupt request is made in the interrupt disabled state, the timer interrupt process is started when the interrupt is enabled in S25. On the other hand, when the power-off confirmation flag is turned on in S23, that is, when the power-off has occurred, the process proceeds to S26 and the power-off processing described below is executed.

Next, as the power cutoff processing (S26 to S32), first, the clear word 2 (“AAH”) is set in order to restart the watchdog timer (S26). Next, it is determined whether or not the content of the power off information flag is the power-on normal data (S27). When it is the power-on normal information (S27: Yes), the power-off normal data is set in the power-off information flag (S28). On the other hand, when the power-on normal information is not obtained (S27: No), the power-off abnormality data is set in the power-off information flag (S29), and the process proceeds to S32.

Next, a checksum is calculated for a predetermined area (excluding the checksum area) of the RAM 103 (S30). Then, the complement for the checksum data is calculated, and the result value of this complement is set in the checksum area of the RAM 103 (S31). Subsequently, the access prohibition setting of the RAM 103 is set (S32), and the process is looped until the power is turned off.

<< Main control side timer interrupt processing >>
Next, the timer interrupt processing on the main control side of the main control board 100 will be described. FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing of the main control board 100. This timer interrupt process is activated by a clock pulse at regular time intervals (for example, 4 ms) from the CTC circuit of the game control microcomputer 110, and is executed in the form of interrupting the above-mentioned main control side main process. In addition, as terms used below, the terms "conditional device" and "continuous operation device for accessory" mean a conceptual control device, and the "conditional device" means a big hit in a special symbol game. The "accessory continuous actuating device" is one that can operate the special electric accessory 77 a plurality of times in succession.

First, when this timer interrupt occurs, the contents of the register in the main CPU 101 are saved in the stack area of the RAM 103, and then the interrupt operation condition is set (S51).

Next, the clear word 2 (“AAH”) is set in order to restart the watchdog timer (S52). At this time, the watchdog timer is cleared and restarted by writing the clear word 1 and the clear word 2 in order to the WDT clear register of the CPU 101 within the preset time-out time. That is, when the main CPU 101 is executing the program normally, the clear words 1 and 2 are set periodically, so that the watchdog timer is cleared and restarted before the time-out occurs. On the other hand, when the watchdog timer times out, a user reset occurs.

Next, the input process is executed (S53). In this input process, information on switches other than the RAM clear switch is read as various switches connected to the main control board 100. That is, input information such as the first start port switch 61, the second start port switch 66, the operation gate switch 71, the grand prize opening switch 76, the door open switch, the frame open switch, the back set open switch, the magnetic sensor, and the radio wave sensor. Is read, their status is judged, and these detection information is stored.

Next, various random number update processes are executed (S54). In this various random number update process, the normal symbol variation pattern random number and the special symbol variation pattern random number are updated. For the normal symbol fluctuation pattern random number, the numerical value of the random number counter is added by 1, and when the numerical value exceeds the maximum value, it is returned to the minimum value "0". On the other hand, for the special symbol variation pattern random number, a predetermined value (for example, 3511) is subtracted from the previous random number. If the subtracted result is less than 0, a predetermined value (for example, 50,000) is added to the subtracted result.

Next, the initial value update type random number update process is executed (S55). In this initial value update type random number update process, a random number per normal symbol, a soft random number per special symbol, and a symbol random number per special symbol are updated. Specifically, the numerical value of each random number counter is added by 1, and when the numerical value exceeds the maximum value, it is returned to "0" which is the minimum value. When the value of the counter goes around once, the value of the corresponding initial value random number is set as the initial value.

Next, the initial value random number update process is executed (S56). In this initial value random number update process, the initial value random number per normal symbol, the soft initial value random number per special symbol, and the symbol initial value random number per special symbol are updated. Specifically, the numerical value of each random number counter is added by 1, and when the numerical value exceeds the maximum value, it is returned to "0" which is the minimum value.

Next, the timer subtraction process is executed (S57). In this timer subtraction process, the values of various timers used for the game operation control of the pachinko gaming machine PM are subtracted and updated. For example, the values of various timers are subtracted by interrupt period (4 ms in this example). The various timers include a special symbol game timer for managing the time (variable time, fixed display time) related to the special symbol display devices 71 and 72.

Next, the second start port validity period setting process is executed (S58). In this second starting port valid period setting process, the winning valid period and the winning invalid period of the second starting port 65 are determined, and as the determination result, the valid period data or the invalid period data of the second starting port 65 is set.

Next, the winning monitoring process is executed (S59). In this winning monitoring process, a game ball switch passage inspection is performed based on the detection information of the first starting port switch 61, the second starting port switch 66, the operating gate switch 71, and the large winning port switch 76 in the input process (S53). As a result, when it is determined that the game ball has passed each switch, the number of prize balls is memorized and a payout control command transmission request is performed.

Next, the prize ball control process is executed (S60). In this prize ball control process, a payout control command is transmitted to the payout control board 400 in order to indicate the number of prize balls corresponding to the type of winning, and the payout control board 400 monitors the data received from the payout control board 400. Perform communication inspection with.

Next, the normal symbol operation gate monitoring process is executed (S61). In this normal symbol operation gate monitoring process, the passage of the game ball to the operation gate 70 is monitored, and when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the operation gate 70, a random number related to the normal symbol lottery is acquired as operation hold ball information. , The number of balls on hold is updated up to a maximum of 4, and the random numbers related to the normal symbol lottery are stored.

Next, the normal symbol control process is executed (S62). In this normal symbol control process, since a series of processes related to the normal symbol display device 85 or the normal electric accessory 67 is performed, the normal symbol changing process and the normal symbol stop symbol display process are performed according to the value of the normal symbol game status. , Processing during normal electric accessory operation, processing during demonstration of normal electric accessory operation end, etc. are executed. In the processing during the change of the normal symbol, the display pattern number data of the normal symbol is created (updated) in order to display the normal symbol in a variable manner or to confirm the display.

Next, the normal symbol change start monitoring process is executed (S63). In this normal symbol fluctuation start monitoring process, when the operating state of the normal symbol is monitored and it is determined that the fluctuation start condition of the normal symbol is satisfied, one normal symbol operation pending ball number is digested and the normal symbol is activated. The hit / fail judgment, the symbol judgment, the fluctuation pattern judgment, the fluctuation time setting, and the like are performed in order.

Next, the start port monitoring control process is executed (S64). In this start port monitoring control process, the winning of the first starting port 60 and the second starting port 65 of the game ball is monitored, and if the game ball is won, the number of reserved balls is updated and the special symbol lottery is related. Random number storage, pre-reading notice effect judgment, command request for the number of symbol storage, etc. are performed in order.

Next, the special symbol control process is executed (S65). In this special symbol control process, as a series of processes related to the special symbol display devices 71 and 72, the special symbol change start process (S420) and the special symbol change process (S430), which will be described in detail later, are processed according to the value of the special symbol game status. ), Processing during special symbol stop symbol display (S440), and the like are executed.

Next, the special electric accessory control process is executed (S66). In this process, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit" or "small hit", the operation start and end of the special electric accessory 77 are set as the operation process related to the special electric accessory 77, and the operation is large. The opening time and the number of times of opening of the winning opening 64 are updated, the operation start setting of the probability fluctuation function, the operation start setting of the fluctuation time shortening function, the setting of the fluctuation pattern selection state, the command request of the demonstration effect, and the like are executed in order.

Next, the large winning opening validity period setting process is executed (S67). In this large winning opening valid period setting process, the winning valid period and the winning invalid period of the large winning opening 64 are determined, and the valid period data or the invalid period data of the large winning opening 64 is set as the determination result.

Next, the special symbol change start monitoring control process is executed (S68). In this special symbol change start monitoring control process, when there is an operation holding ball of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, one reserved ball is digested, a command request for the number of symbol storage numbers, and a judgment of whether or not the special symbol is correct , Design determination of special symbol, determination of probability fluctuation function, determination of time reduction function, setting of operation pattern of special electric accessory, setting of demo production time, etc. are performed in order.

Next, the abnormality detection process is executed (S69). In this abnormality detection process, based on the input information in the input process (S53), the magnetic detection signal by the magnetic sensor, the disconnection short circuit power supply abnormality signal, the radio wave detection signal by the radio wave sensor, the door / frame opening signal, etc. are inspected in order. , Determine whether the game machine is in an error state. In the case of an error state, an effect control command (“error effect designation command”) including the error information is generated in order to request the effect control board 200 to display an error.

Next, the ball entry passage time abnormality detection process is executed (S70). In this ball entry passage time abnormality detection process, when the on signal of the winning detection switch is continuously detected for a predetermined time or longer, the ball entry passage time abnormality is set and the effect control command (“error”) including the error information is set. In addition to requesting the effect designation command "), it also requests the output of a security signal to be output to the external terminal.

Next, the game status display process is executed (S71). In this game state display process, display data such as the number of times the special electric accessory 77 is continuously operated (specified number of rounds), the number of balls on hold for normal symbols and special symbols, and the like are created. In addition, display data for displaying the error state information detected in the abnormality detection process on the state indicator lamp of the main control board 100 is created.

Next, the steering wheel status signal inspection process is executed (S72). In this handle state signal inspection process, the touch state of the launch handle 12 is monitored based on the detection information from the touch sensor of the launch handle 12, and an effect control command (command of the handle state effect) is issued based on the result of this monitoring. Generate.

Next, the LED output process is executed (S73). In this LED output process, the above-mentioned special symbol control process (S65), in order to display a special symbol and a normal symbol, display the number of reserved balls, the number of times the special electric accessory operates continuously, display an error, and the like. The display data created by the abnormality detection process (S69), the game status display process (S71), etc. is displayed on each special symbol display device 71, 72, normal symbol display device 85, each special symbol hold lamp 73, 74, and normal figure hold. The data is output to the lamp 86, the status indicator lamp of the main control board 100, and the like, and the display on these various display devices is initialized.

Next, the launch control signal output process is executed (S74). In this launch control signal output process, when a communication abnormality with the payout control board 400 or a short-circuit power supply abnormality is not detected, a launch permission signal is output to the payout control board 400 to allow the game ball to be launched. To do. On the other hand, when a communication abnormality with the payout control board 400 or a short-circuit power supply abnormality is detected, a launch prohibition signal is output to the payout control board 400 to prohibit the launch of the game ball.

Next, the test signal output process is executed (S75). In this test signal output process, various test signals indicating the operating state of the gaming machine are created and output to an external test device in the performance confirmation test for determining whether or not the gaming machine is appropriate.

Next, the solenoid output process is executed (S76). In this solenoid output process, in the above-mentioned ordinary symbol control process (S62) and special electric accessory control process (S66) in order to operate each electric accessory 622,642. Based on the acquired control data, an excitation signal is output to each of the electric accessory solenoids 623 and 643.

Next, the effect control command transmission process is executed (S77). In this effect control command transmission process, the effect control command specified by the pointer is read from the effect control commands stored in the command storage area (ring buffer) of the main information storage means 180 in the above process, and this effect is produced. A control command is transmitted to the effect control board 200.

Next, the external information output process is executed (S78). In this external information output processing, the operating state information of the gaming machine is output as external information to an external device such as a hall computer via the external terminal board.

Next, the contents of the saved register are restored, and the main CPU 101 is set to the interrupt enabled state (S79). As a result, the main control side timer interrupt process is terminated, the process returns to the main control side main process, and the main control side main process is executed until the next timer interrupt occurs.

When the main control board 100 detects a power outage (a decrease in the supply voltage based on a predetermined threshold value) during the main control side main processing or interrupt processing, a non-masqueradable interrupt is generated and the power outage confirmation flag is turned on. To do. Then, after returning to the original processing, the above-mentioned power off processing (S)
26 to S32) will be executed.

≪Special design game processing≫
Next, a series of processes related to the special symbol game in the timer interrupt process on the main control side will be described. The processing related to the special symbol game includes the above-mentioned start port monitoring control processing (S64), special symbol control processing (S65), special electric accessory control processing (S66), special symbol fluctuation start monitoring control processing (S68), and the like. Is applicable.

(Starting port monitoring control process)
First, the start port monitoring control process (S64) will be described. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing the details of the start port monitoring control process (S64).

First, it is determined whether or not the winning of the game to the first starting port 60 is detected (S201). When the winning of the first starting port 60 is detected (S201: YES), it is determined whether or not the number of balls on hold for operation of the first special symbol is less than the upper limit of 4 (S202).

When the number of balls on hold for operation of the first special symbol is less than 4 (S202: YES), the lottery random number values related to the first special symbol game include a random value per special symbol, a random value per symbol, and a special symbol. The fluctuation pattern random value is acquired, and each random value is stored in the first special symbol hold storage area (hold n storage area) of the main information storage means 180 according to the ball entry order (S203). Then, as an update of the number of balls on hold for operation of the first special symbol, the value of the number of balls on hold for the first special symbol is added by 1 (S204), and the winning check of the first starting port 60 is completed.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the winning of the game to the second starting port 65 is detected (S205). When the winning of the second starting port 65 is detected (S205: YES), it is determined whether or not the number of balls on hold for operation of the second special symbol is less than the upper limit of 4 (S206). When the number of balls on hold for operation of the second special symbol is less than 4 (S206: YES), the lottery random number values related to the second special symbol game include a random value per special symbol, a random value per symbol, and a special symbol. The fluctuation pattern random value is acquired, and each random value is stored in the second special symbol hold storage area (hold n storage area) of the main information storage means 180 according to the ball entry order (S207). Then, as an update of the number of balls on hold for operation of the second special symbol, the value of the number of balls on hold for the second special symbol is added by 1 (S208), and the winning check of the second starting port 65 is completed.

Subsequently, whether or not the number of reserved balls for the first special symbol or the second special symbol has been updated, that is, whether or not the number of reserved balls for the first special symbol or the second special symbol has been added in S204 or S208. (S209). When the number of operation-holding balls is updated (S209: YES), a symbol storage number command including information on the number of operation-holding balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is generated, and this is used as the main information storage means. It is stored in the command storage area of 180 (S210).

Next, the state of the gaming machine is confirmed, and it is determined whether or not it is the pre-determination timing of the pre-reading notice effect (S211). As described above, the pre-judgment timing is (1) waiting for a hit and (2) waiting for a hit when the operation holding ball of the first special symbol is acquired while the electric chew support function is not operating. , When the operation hold ball of the second special symbol is acquired while the electric chew support function is operating, or (3) When the operation hold ball of the second special symbol is acquired during the big hit or the small hit. It's time to be satisfied. When it is the pre-determination timing (S211: YES), the random number value per special symbol is read from the hit random number buffer in the reserved n storage area, and the pre-determination of success or failure is performed (S212). Then, a pass / fail pre-determination command including the determination result information (notice number) is generated, and this is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 (S213).

Further, the symbol random number value per special symbol is read from the hit symbol random number buffer in the reserved n storage area, and the symbol pre-determination is performed (S214). Then, a symbol pre-determination command including the determination result information (notice number) is generated, and this is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 (S215). Further, the special symbol variation pattern random number value is read from the variation pattern random number buffer in the reserved n storage area, and the variation pattern pre-determination is performed (S216). Then, a variation pattern pre-determination command including the determination result information (notice number) is generated, and this is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 (S217).

(Special symbol change start monitoring control processing)
Next, the special symbol change start monitoring control process (S68) will be described. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol change start monitoring control process (S68).

In this special symbol change start monitoring control process (S68), the special symbol change start monitoring process described later is performed on the special symbol side of the first special symbol and the second special symbol that satisfies the fluctuation start condition. (S310) is executed. When both the first special symbol and the second special symbol satisfy the fluctuation start condition, the processing on the second special symbol side is preferentially executed as described above.

First, it is determined whether or not the hit is a big hit or a small hit (S301). Subsequently, whether both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are waiting for fluctuation, that is, whether the first special symbol game status and the second special symbol game status are both "00H (waiting for fluctuation)". It is determined whether or not (S302).

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls for operation of the second special symbol is "0" (S303), and if the number of reserved balls is not "0" (S303: NO), the second special It is considered that the symbol variation start condition is satisfied, and the address of the second special symbol variation start monitoring table (addresses of various tables used in the subsequent processing and addresses of the RAM storage area) is set (S304). , The process shifts to the special symbol change start monitoring process (S310) on the second special symbol side. That is, in the present embodiment, when the operation holding ball of the second special symbol is present, the operation holding ball of the second special symbol is given priority regardless of the presence or absence of the operation holding ball of the first special symbol. It is supposed to be digested.

On the other hand, when the number of balls on hold for operation of the second special symbol is "0" (S303: YES), it is determined whether or not the number of balls on hold for operation of the first special symbol is "0" (S305). .. Here, when the number of reserved balls is not "0" (S305: NO), it is considered that the change start condition of the first special symbol is satisfied, and the address of the first special symbol change start monitoring table (hereinafter). After setting (addresses of various tables used in the process and addresses of the RAM storage area) (S306), the process proceeds to the special symbol change start monitoring process (S310) on the first special symbol side.

If the fluctuation start conditions of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not satisfied (S301: YES, S302: NO, S305: YES), the special symbol fluctuation start monitoring process (S310) is skipped. ..

(Special symbol change start monitoring process)
Next, the special symbol change start monitoring process (S310) will be described. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol change start monitoring process (S310).

In this special symbol fluctuation start monitoring process (S310), the target of the current fluctuation start is set with reference to the first special symbol fluctuation start monitoring table or the second special symbol fluctuation start monitoring table set in S304 or S306 described above. However, since the processing method is the same for the first special symbol side and the second special symbol side, the processing on the first special symbol side is used except in special cases. It will be described collectively without distinguishing whether it is a process or a process on the second special symbol side.

First, the number of pending balls on the special symbol side, which is the target of the start of this fluctuation, is subtracted by 1 (S311). Then, a symbol storage number command including information on the number of operation-holding balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol after subtraction is generated, and this is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 (S312). Subsequently, the special symbol hold storage area on the special symbol side that is the target of this fluctuation start is accessed, and the random value per special symbol and the special symbol per special symbol stored in the earliest reserved storage area (hold 1 storage area). The symbol random value and the special symbol variation pattern random value are read out in order, and these random values are used for the special symbol hit / fail determination process (S320), the symbol determination process (S330), and the variation pattern selection process (S423), which will be described later. The information is transferred to the special symbol hit / miss determination area, the special symbol symbol determination area, and the special symbol variation pattern determination area of the main information storage means 180 (S313). Further, as the update of the hold storage area, the hold ball information stored in the hold 2 storage area to the hold 4 storage area is shifted to the lower hold storage area, and the hold 4 storage area is cleared to zero (S314).

Subsequently, the special symbol hit / miss determination process is executed (S320). In the special symbol winning / failing determination process (S320), first, the special symbol winning / failing lottery table is acquired. At this time, if the game state is the special symbol probability change state, the high-probability winning / losing lottery table is acquired, and if the gaming state is the normal state, the low-probability winning / losing lottery table is acquired. Next, the random value per special symbol is read from the special symbol hit / miss determination area of the main information storage means 180. Then, with reference to the special symbol winning / failing lottery table, the winning / failing determination of the special symbol is executed based on the random number value per special symbol. Further, the values corresponding to the hit / fail determination result (big hit data “55H”, small hit data “33H”, loss data “00H”) are stored in the special symbol determination flag of the main information storage means 180.

Subsequently, the symbol determination process is executed (S330). In the symbol determination process (S330), the stop symbol of the special symbol, the type of the symbol group, and the character effect number (variable additional symbol information) are determined according to the result of the hit / fail determination. Then, the stop symbol of the special symbol determined this time, the type of the symbol group, and the character effect number are stored in the symbol storage area of the main information storage means 180. The character effect number is the type of the determined symbol group (8 patterns of the symbol groups A to L) and the operating state of the probability variation function of the special symbol and the normal symbol (probability change on of the special symbol / probability change off of the special symbol). / One of a total of 32 patterns is determined based on the combination with the probability variation on of the normal symbol / the probability variation off of the normal symbol). If the result of the hit / fail judgment is wrong, the character effect number "0" is determined.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the result of the hit / fail determination corresponds to a small hit (S341), and whether or not the result of the hit / fail determination corresponds to a big hit (S342). If the result of the hit / fail judgment is a small hit (S341: YES), the process proceeds to S347, and if the result of the pass / fail judgment is incorrect (S341: NO, S342: NO), the process proceeds to S349.

On the other hand, when the result of the hit / fail judgment is a big hit (S341: NO, S342: YES), the special symbol is set as the gaming state after the special game based on the type of the symbol group (big hit type) determined in S333. It is determined whether or not to activate the probability fluctuation function (S343). That is, when the type of the symbol group (big hit type) indicates a specific symbol, it is determined to add the probability variation function, and when the type of the symbol group indicates a normal symbol, the probability variation Decide not to grant the function. This determination result is stored in the probability fluctuation determination flag of the main information storage means 180.

Further, based on the type of symbol group (big hit type) determined in S333, the number of times the variable time shortening function is operated is determined as the game state after the special game (S344), and the number of times the electric chew support function is operated is determined. (S345). This determination result (information on the number of times of operation of the fluctuation time shortening function, information on the number of times of operation of the electric chew support function) is stored in the time reduction number storage area and the ball entry easy state number storage area of the main information storage means 180.

Subsequently, based on the type of symbol group (big hit type) determined in S333, the special electric accessory 7
The operation pattern of 7 is set (S346). Specifically, as the operation pattern of the special electric accessory 77, the specified number of rounds of the round game (16 rounds, 12 rounds, 2 rounds in this example), and the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 64 (30 in this example). Seconds, 0.05 seconds), etc. are set.

Next, the variation pattern selection state after the end of the special game or the small hit game is set based on the type of the symbol group determined in S333 and the current game state (S347). Subsequently, the demo production time (hit start demo time and hit end demo time) of the special game or the small hit game is set based on the type of the symbol group determined in S333 (S348). Next, the special symbol hit / miss determination area and the special symbol symbol determination area of the main information storage means 180 used in the above-mentioned special symbol hit / miss determination process (S320) and the symbol determination process (S330) are cleared (S349). Then, the special symbol game status on the special symbol side to be changed this time is changed from "00H (standby)" to "01H (start of fluctuation)" (S350).

(Special symbol control processing)
Next, the special symbol control process (S65) will be described. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol control process (S65).

First, it is determined whether or not the special electric accessory 77 is not operating, that is, whether or not the special electric accessory game status is "00H (waiting for hit)" (S401). Subsequently, when the special electric accessory 77 is not operating (S401: YES), it is determined whether or not the second special symbol game status is "00H (standby)" (S402).

When the second special symbol game status is not "00H (waiting)" (S402: YES), the second special symbol control table (used in the subsequent processing) is used to execute the process related to the second special symbol. The address of various tables and the address of the RAM storage area) are set (S403), and the process proceeds to the special symbol control general-purpose processing (S410). On the other hand, when the second special symbol game status is "00H (waiting)" (S402: NO), the first special symbol control table (in the subsequent processing) is executed in order to execute the process related to the first special symbol. The addresses of the various tables used and the addresses of the RAM storage areas) are set (S404), and the process proceeds to the special symbol control general-purpose processing (S410).

In the special symbol control general-purpose processing (S410) described below, the first special symbol control table or the second special symbol control table set in the above-mentioned S403 or S404 is used, and the special subject to this change is used. The processing on the symbol side will be executed, but since the processing method is the same for the first special symbol side and the second special symbol side, is it the processing on the first special symbol side except in special cases? , The second special symbol side processing will be described collectively without distinguishing whether it is the processing.

(Special symbol control general-purpose processing)
Subsequently, the special symbol control general-purpose processing is executed (S410). Here, FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol control general-purpose processing (S410).

In this special symbol control general-purpose processing (S410), branch processing (S411 to S414) for shifting to processing according to the value of the special symbol game status (“01H”, “02H”, “03H”) is executed. First, it is determined whether or not the special symbol game status on the special symbol side that is the target of this change is not 0 (S411). When the special symbol game status is not "00H" (S411: YES), it is determined whether or not the special symbol game status is "01H (start of fluctuation)" (S412). When the special symbol game status is "01H" (S412: YES), the process proceeds to the special symbol variation start process (S420). If NO in S412, it is determined whether or not the special symbol game status is "02H (changing)" (
S413). When the special symbol game status is "02H" (S413: YES), the process proceeds to the special symbol changing process (S430). If NO in S413, it is determined whether or not the special symbol game status is "03H (stop symbol is being displayed)" (S414). When the special symbol game status is "03H" (S414: YES), the process proceeds to the process of displaying the special symbol stop symbol (S440).

(Special symbol change start processing)
Next, the special symbol variation start processing (S420) will be described. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol variation start processing (S420).

First, a special symbol variation pattern table is acquired based on the result of the winning / failing lottery, the variation pattern selection state, and the like (S421). Subsequently, the special symbol variation pattern random value is read out from the special symbol variation pattern determination area of the main information storage means 180 (S422). Then, with reference to the special symbol variation pattern table, one of a plurality of types of variation patterns is selected based on the special symbol variation pattern random value (S423).

Next, the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern selected this time is set (S424). Then, as a setting for starting the variation of the special symbol, the variation time is stored in the special symbol game timer of the symbol display control means 165 (S425), and the variation start command to the effect control board 200 is generated (S426). As the fluctuation start command, in order to start the inspection and effect display of the communication line between the main control board 100 and the effect control board 200, the communication inspection command, the variation addition symbol information specification command, the variation pattern specification command, and the character effect number specification command are used. Are created in order and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180.

Subsequently, the content of the special symbol variation pattern determination area of the main information storage means 180 used for determining the variation pattern is cleared (S427). Then, the special symbol game status is changed from "01H (start of fluctuation)" to "02H (during fluctuation)" (S428).

(Processing during special symbol change)
Next, the processing during special symbol change (S430) will be described. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol changing process (S430).

First, in order to perform variable display of the special symbol, the display pattern number switching process of the special symbol is executed (S431). In this display pattern number switching process (S431), display pattern number data of a special symbol is generated at each predetermined switching time. This display pattern number data is output to the first special symbol display device 81 or the second special symbol display device 82 in the LED output process (S73) in order to display the special symbol in a variable manner or a definite display.

Next, it is determined whether or not the special symbol game timer has reached "0 (timeout)", that is, whether or not the fluctuation time of the special symbol has expired (S432). When the fluctuation time of the special symbol ends (S432: YES), the stop symbol of the special symbol to be confirmed and displayed on the first special symbol display device 81 or the second special symbol display device 82 is set (S433). Subsequently, a fluctuation stop command for instructing the effect control board 200 to confirm and display the decorative symbol is generated, and this is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 (S434).

Next, "500 (ms)" is stored as the fixed display time in the special symbol game timer (S435). The "fixed display time" is a time for definitively stopping and displaying the stopped symbol when the special symbol is stopped fluctuating. Then, the special symbol game status is changed from "02H (during change)" to "03H (during stop symbol display)" (S436).

(Processing during special symbol stop symbol display)
Next, the special symbol stop symbol display processing (S440) will be described. FIGS. 85 to 86 are flowcharts showing the details of the special symbol stop symbol display processing (S440).

First, it is determined whether or not the special symbol game timer has reached "0 (timeout)", that is, whether or not the final display time of the special symbol (stop symbol) has expired (S441). Here, when the final display time of the special symbol ends (S441: YES), the special symbol game status is changed from "03H (stop symbol display)" to "00H (standby)" (S442).

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the hit / fail determination data stored in the special symbol determination flag of the main information storage means 180 is the jackpot data “55H” (S443). When the hit / fail judgment data is jackpot data (S443: YES), the operation of the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is stopped (S444), the operation of the function for shortening the fluctuation time of the special symbol is stopped (S445), and the electric chew support function is activated. Stop (S446) is performed in order. Specifically, "00H (not activated)" is set in the special symbol mode flag, and "00H" is set in the time reduction counter and the ball entry easy state counter to clear zero.

Next, as the hit start demo setting process of the special game, the hit start demo display time is set, and an effect control command (hit start demo command) for instructing the start of the hit start demo effect is generated (S447). Subsequently, the number of executions of the fluctuation pattern selection state (variation pattern selection state count counter) is cleared to zero (S448). In addition, the special electric accessory game status is changed from "00H (waiting for hit)" to "01H (special game)" (S449). Then, "00H" is set in order to clear the contents of the pass / fail determination flag (S450).

On the other hand, when the hit / fail determination data is not the jackpot data (S443: NO), it is determined whether or not the probability variation function of the special symbol is operating (S451). When the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is operating (S451: YES), the probability fluctuation counter of the main information storage means 180 is decremented by 1 as the digestion of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol this time (step S452). .. Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the probability fluctuation number counter is zero (step S453). When the probability fluctuation number counter is zero (S453: YES), the operation of the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is stopped (S454). If the probability fluctuation counter after subtraction is not zero (S453: NO), S454 is skipped and the process proceeds to S455.

Next, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time shortening function of the special symbol is operating (S455). When the function for shortening the fluctuation time of the special symbol is operating (S455: YES), the time reduction counter of the main information storage means 180 is decremented by 1 as the digestion of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol this time (step S456). .. Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the time reduction counter is zero (step S457). When the time reduction counter is zero (S457: YES), it is assumed that the number of times the special symbol time reduction state has been completed has been reached, and the operation of the special symbol fluctuation time reduction function is stopped (S458). If the time reduction counter after subtraction is not zero (S457: NO), S458 is skipped and the process proceeds to S459.

Next, it is determined whether or not the electric chew support function is operating (S459). When the electric chew support function is operating (S459: YES), the counter for the number of easy entry states of the main information storage means 180 is subtracted by 1 as the digestion of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol this time (step S460). .. Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the ball entry easy state count counter is zero (step S461). When the ball entry easy state count counter is zero (S461: YES), the operation of the electric chew support function is stopped as the number of times the ball entry ease state ends has been reached (S462). If the ball entry ease state counter after subtraction is not zero (S461: NO), S462 is skipped and the process proceeds to S463.

Next, the fluctuation pattern selection state count counter of the main information storage means 180 is decremented by 1 (S463). Then, the fluctuation pattern selection state is updated (S464). Specifically, the number of times of the variation pattern selection state of the main information storage means 180 is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the number of executions of the current variation pattern selection state has reached the preset number of ends, and the number of ends is determined. If it has been reached, it switches to the fluctuation pattern selection state specified next. On the other hand, if the number of ends has not been reached, the current fluctuation pattern selection state is maintained.

Next, an effect control command (game state designation command) including the current game state information and fluctuation pattern selection state information updated in S451 to S464 described above is generated, and this is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. Store in (S465). On the effect control board 200 side, the effect mode is set and updated based on the information of the game state designation command.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the small hit data "33H" is stored in the special symbol determination flag (S466). When the small hit data is stored (S466: YES), as the hit start demo setting process of the small hit game, the hit start demo display time is set and the effect control command instructing the start of the hit start demo effect is performed. Is generated (S467). Subsequently, the special electric accessory game status is changed from "00H (waiting for hit)" to "02H (small hit game)" (S468). Then, "00H" is set in order to clear the contents of the hit / fail determination flag (S469).

On the other hand, when the small hit data "33H" is not stored in the special symbol determination flag (S466: NO), that is, when the special symbol determination flag contains the deviation data "00H", S467 to S469 are set. skip. When the special symbol determination flag is out-of-order data, the processing for clearing the content of the flag is not performed because "00H" is originally stored as the out-of-order data.

(Special electric accessory control process)
Next, the special electric accessory control process (S66) will be described. 87 to 89 are flowcharts showing the details of the electric accessory control process (S66).

First, it is determined whether or not the special electric accessory game status is "01H (special game)" (S501). When the special electric accessory game status is "01H" (S501: YES), the special game process is executed in the subsequent processes. In this special game process, first, it is determined whether or not the special electric accessory 77 is operating (S502). When the special electric accessory 77 is not operating (S502: NO), it is determined whether or not it is the operation start time of the special electric accessory 77 (S503). The operation start time of the special electric accessory 77 is a timing at which the operation of the special electric accessory 77 is started in each round game.

When it is the operation start time of the special electric accessory 77 (S503: YES), the operation of the special electric accessory 77 is started (S504), and as a process during the operation of the special electric accessory 77, S505 to S509 Executes the processing of.

As a process during operation of the special electric accessory 77, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the maximum number of winnings in the large winning opening 64 (S505), and the operating time (opening time) of the special electric accessory 77 is determined. It is determined whether or not the elapse has passed (S506). At this time, if the game ball wins the maximum number of winnings in the large winning opening 64 (S505: YES) or the operating time of the special electric accessory 77 has elapsed (S506: YES), the special electric accessory 77 The operation is stopped (S507). Then, it is determined whether or not the number of continuous operations of the special electric accessory 77 has reached a predetermined number of predetermined rounds (S508). When the number of continuous operations has not reached the specified number of rounds (S508: NO), the number of continuous operations of the special electric accessory 77 is incremented by 1 (S509).

On the other hand, when the number of continuous operations of the special electric accessory 77 has reached the specified number of rounds (S508: YES), the process proceeds to S510, and the hit end demo display time is set as the hit end demo setting process of the special game. Along with setting, an effect control command (hit end demo command) for instructing the start of the hit end demo effect is generated (S510).

Subsequently, the fluctuation time reduction number information set in S344 is stored in the time reduction counter (S511). Further, the information on the number of easy-to-enter states set in S345 is stored in the counter for the number of easy-to-enter states (S512).

Subsequently, with reference to the content of the probability fluctuation determination flag set in S343, it is determined whether or not the operation of the condition device is an operation by a specific symbol (so-called probability variation symbol) (S513). When the condition device is operated by the specific symbol (S513: YES), the operation data "7FH" is stored in the probability fluctuation number counter of the main information storage means 180, and the operation of the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is started. (S514). On the other hand, when the condition device is not operated by the specific symbol (S513: NO), the non-operating data “00H” is stored in the probability fluctuation number counter and S514 is skipped.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time reduction number information stored in the time reduction counter is the fluctuation time reduction function operation data (data other than "00H") (S515). In the case of the fluctuation time shortening function operation data (S515: YES), the operation of the fluctuation time shortening function of the special symbol is started (S516). On the other hand, if it is not the fluctuation time shortening function operation data (S515: NO), S516 is skipped.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the ball entry easy state count information stored in the ball entry easy state count counter is the electric chew support function operation data (data other than "00H") (S517). In the case of the electric chew support function operation data (S517: YES), the operation of the electric chew support function is started (S518 to S520). That is, the start of operation of the probability fluctuation function of the normal symbol (S518), the start of the operation of the function for shortening the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (S519), and the start of the operation of the open extension function of the normal electric accessory 67 (S520) are executed in order. On the other hand, if it is not the electric chew support function operation data, S518 to S520 are skipped.

Then, it switches to the fluctuation pattern selection state determined in S347 (S521). Subsequently, an effect control command (game state designation command) including the game state information after the special game and the variation pattern selection state information set in S511 to S521 described above is generated, and this is used by the main information storage means 180. It is stored in the command storage area (S522). The effect control board 200 side sets the effect mode after the special game based on the information of the game state designation command. Then, the special electric accessory game status is changed from "01H (special game)" to "00H (waiting for hit)" (S523).

On the other hand, if the special electric accessory game status is not "01H (special game)" (S501: NO), it shifts to S530 and is the special electric accessory game status "02H (small hit game)"? It is determined whether or not (S530). When the special electric accessory game status is "02H" (S530: YES), the small hit game process is executed in the subsequent processes.

In the small hit game process, first, it is determined whether or not the special electric accessory 77 is operating (S531). When the special electric accessory 77 is not operating (S531: NO), the operation of the special electric accessory 77 is started (S532). On the other hand, when the special electric accessory 77 is in operation (
In S531: YES), S532 is skipped.

Subsequently, as a process during operation of the special electric accessory 77, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the maximum number of winnings in the large winning opening 64 (S533), and the operating time of the special electric accessory 77 (opening). It is determined whether or not the time) has elapsed (S534). At this time, if the game ball wins the maximum number of winnings in the large winning opening 64 (S533: YES) or the operating time of the special electric accessory 77 has elapsed (S534: YES), the special electric accessory 77 The operation is stopped (S535).

Subsequently, as the hit end demo setting process of the small hit game, the hit end demo display time is set, and an effect control command (win end demo command) instructing the start of the hit end demo effect is generated (S536). Then, it switches to the fluctuation pattern selection state determined in S347 (S537). Subsequently, an effect control command (game state designation command) including the variation pattern selection state information after the special game set in S537 is generated, and this is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 ( S538). This game state designation command is used on the effect control board 200 side to determine the transition trigger of the effect mode, specify the effect mode of the transition destination, and the like. Then, the special electric accessory game status is changed from "01H (special game)" to "00H (waiting for hit)" (S538).

[Processing on the production control board side]
Next, the procedure of the operation processing on the effect control board 200 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 90 to 98. The processing on the effect control board 200 side includes a reset start process (including the effect control side main process) that is executed when the sub-main CPU 201 is reset, such as after the power is turned on, and an effect control side timer interrupt that is activated at regular intervals. The lamp is activated when the processing, the reception interrupt processing of the effect control command activated by the strobe signal from the main control board 100, and the arrival of the predetermined occurrence time specified in the time schedule of the variation effect pattern. It is composed of an effect interrupt process, a transmission interrupt process of an image control command that is activated at regular intervals, and a receive interrupt process of an ACK command that is activated when the ACK command is received. In the present embodiment, the above-mentioned plurality of types of interrupt processing are illustrated, but in reality, other interrupt processing also exists.

For each interrupt processing (exception processing), a priority level indicating the priority when a plurality of interrupt processing occurs is set. FIG. 99 is a schematic diagram for explaining the priority level of interrupt processing. In this example, "reset start processing by power reset (FIG. 90): highest priority", "reset start processing due to various abnormalities (FIG. 90): highest priority" → "reception interrupt processing of effect control command (FIG. 97): "Level 7"-> "Reset start processing by WDT (when runaway is detected): Level 3"-> "Image control command transmission interrupt processing: Level 2", "ACK command reception interrupt processing: Level 2"-> " The priority levels are ranked in the order of "effect control side timer interrupt process (FIG. 98): level 1", "ramp effect interrupt process (FIG. 95): level 1", and the like. The "reset start process due to various abnormalities" is, for example, during DMA (Direct Memory Access) transfer when the CPU 201 executes an illegal instruction, when the CPU 201 tries to access an illegal area or an illegal method. It starts when the error of. In the present embodiment, the above-mentioned plurality of types of interrupt processing are illustrated, but in reality, other interrupt processing also exists.

In the main process on the effect control side, basically, the process proceeds after being set to either the all interrupt disabled state or the interrupt disabled state other than the effect control command reception interrupt. Then, when the effect control side main process is in the interrupt enabled state, each interrupt process is started in the form of interrupting the main process. In each interrupt process, when another interrupt process is requested (multiple interrupts occur) during the execution of the interrupt process, in principle, the interrupt process has a higher priority level than the interrupt process being executed. The interrupt request is permitted, but the interrupt request is prohibited when the interrupt processing has a lower priority level than the interrupt processing being executed or the interrupt processing has the same priority level. That is, each interrupt process is processed in a state in which other interrupts having the same priority level or a lower priority level are disabled. Then, each interrupt process returns to the effect control side main process with all interrupts enabled. The priority order (priority level) of such an interrupt factor is defined by the register setting of the effect control microcomputer 210 (interrupt controller).

<< Reset start processing >>
First, the reset start process of the effect control board 200 will be described. FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing a reset start process of the effect control board 200. In this reset start process, the reset is started by any of reset when the power is turned on, reset due to various abnormalities, and reset due to WDT (when runaway is detected), and after the security check of the sub-main CPU 201 is performed. , The program starts, and the processing after S601 is started.

First, as an initial setting required when the power is turned on, the start address is set in the stack pointer as the initial value of the stack area (S601). Then, all interrupt processing is prohibited until various initial settings are completed (S602).

Subsequently, as a basic setting related to hardware, an initial value is set in the built-in register provided in the sub-main CPU 201, and the I / O port circuit 204 is initialized (S603). Further, the memory area in the RAM 203 of the effect control microcomputer 210 is initialized (S604). Here, the initial value is set for the variable with the initial value, and the variable without the initial value is initialized by clearing 0. Further, the sub-main CPU 201 appropriately expands the control program stored in the ROM 202 into the RAM 203.

Subsequently, interrupts other than the reception interrupt processing of the effect control command are prohibited (S605). Next, among various errors set in advance for each model, a process of setting the type of error to be valid for the model is performed (S606). Further, a turn-off request is made to turn off the effect lamp LP completely (S607). Then, the watchdog timer is activated to monitor the runaway of the sub-main CPU 201 (S608).

Subsequently, the effect control side main process is executed as the main process of the game effect (S609). The details of this effect control side main process (S609) will be described later with reference to FIG. 91. When shifting to the main process on the production control side in S609, it is usually impossible to return from the main process to the reset start process, but in the unlikely event that the process returns to this process due to a program bug or the like. Transitions to a low power consumption mode (sleep mode) in which the power consumption is reduced as compared with the normal operation (S610).

<< Main processing on the production control side >>
Next, the effect control side main process (S609) of the effect control board 200 will be described. FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing the effect control side main process (S609).

First, an address (starting address where the program is expanded) for starting a check as to whether or not the control program is accurately expanded in the RAM 203 is acquired in the main process on the effect control side (S611). Subsequently, all interrupts are permitted (starting of various interrupt processes is permitted) (S612).

Next, the device initialization operation is executed (S613). This initialization operation is an operation mode that is executed only once when the power of the pachinko gaming machine PM is turned on (at the start of reset), and in order to control the operation of each effect device by a device such as a motor or a solenoid. It is executed for the purpose of confirming the required location information. At the end of the initialization operation, each effect device returns to a preset initial position (reference position). In addition to each effect device (movable accessory), a reset signal (electric signal) output or reset command (command information) is sent to the image control means (sub-sub CPU) in order to reset the display of the image display device or the like. Send. If the power is turned on after the power is turned off during the variable display of the decorative symbol, an image control command that only displays the decorative symbol in a variable manner is output after the reset signal (or reset command) is output. The effect performed in addition to the variable display of the decorative pattern is not executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a time lag or the like of the effect display due to the time difference until each control board completes the process related to the start-up from the power failure.

Subsequently, the watchdog timer is cleared in order to restart the watchdog timer (S614). At this time, when the sub-main CPU 201 is executing the program normally, the watchdog timer is set by writing a predetermined clear word to the WDT clear register of the sub-main CPU 201 within the preset timeout time. Cleared and restarted. On the other hand, when the watchdog timer times out, a user reset occurs.

Subsequently, the out-of-order symbol update process is executed (S615). In this missing symbol update process, the missing symbol counter set in the RAM 203 is updated. The out-of-design symbol counter is a loop counter for determining the out-of-order symbol combination of decorative symbols, and for example, the range from "111" to "999" is incremented by 1 to perform a circular operation. In this example, since all the combinations of decorative symbols (big hit symbol, small hit symbol, out-of-reach symbol, non-reach out-of-reach symbol, etc.) are determined by random number lottery, this process is not actually performed.

Subsequently, the input port check process is executed (S616). In this input port check process, the reading of the I / O port circuit 204 (input port) in the port input / output process S712 in the timer interrupt process described later is monitored for each interrupt occurrence, and is monitored a plurality of times (for example, 4 times). When all the input port states are "1", the signal level is set to "1 (H level)", when all are "0", the signal level is set to "0 (L level)", and in other cases, the signal level is set. Do not change (this confirms the input signal). The I / O port circuit 204 monitors input information such as a detection signal of a position detection sensor of each effect device and an abnormality monitoring signal, and outputs or operates a drive signal (drive data described later) to each effect device. It has a function to send control commands.

Subsequently, the error effect management process is executed (S617). In this error effect management process, error effect by various devices is started based on the error effect pattern set in the subsequent command analysis process (S621). Here, when the lamp effect number is set in the command analysis process (S621) (when there is a lamp request) in order to perform the error notification lamp effect which is one aspect of the error effect, the lamp corresponding to this lamp effect number. The pattern data is specified and the error notification lamp effect is started. In the lamp pattern data, the lamp data associated with each frame time (time required to update the image frame once: 16 ms) is stored as schedule data. Further, in this lamp pattern data, layers (details will be described later) are set according to the type of lamp effect. Further, in the error effect management process, an initial value (error effect time) is set in the error management timer to manage the progress of the error effect. This error management timer is subtracted and updated at a cycle of 16 ms in the error management timer update process (S720) of the effect control side timer interrupt process. Then, when the error management timer times out, the effect lamp LP is turned off to end the error effect.

Subsequently, the effect button monitoring control process is executed (S618). In this effect button monitoring control process, when the button advance effect is incorporated during the symbol variation, the input state of the effect button 10 within the operation effective time is monitored, and a plurality of preset effect buttons are set according to the button advance effect. From the seeds of the effect content, the content of the effect according to the input state of the effect button 10 is determined.

Subsequently, the advance notice lottery management process is executed (S619). In this advance notice lottery management process, the advance notice effect pattern (preliminary effect pattern) that defines the contents of the advance notice effect that occurs at each stage of the change process of the decorative pattern according to the scenario of the variation effect pattern selected in the subsequent command analysis process (S621). The advance notice production number) will be decided by lottery. The notice effect number determined here is temporarily stored in the notice effect number storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260. In addition, an image control command for designating the advance notice production number on the image control board 300 side is generated. At this time, when the character advance notice effect pattern (character advance notice effect number) is selected as the advance notice effect pattern, a character request is generated, and the effect device is driven in the subsequent device management process (S620). The pattern is identified. In this example, all of the plurality of types of notice effects (notice effect patterns) that occur within one variation of the decorative pattern are not drawn by lottery within one main loop process, but the efficiency of the main loop processing is improved. In order to make the notice effect occur, the lottery is performed over a plurality of main loop processes by dividing it into each time when the advance notice effect occurs (for example, the fluctuation start stage, the reach generation stage, and the fluctuation stop stage). At that time, regarding the advance notice effect that occurs at the start stage of the change of the decorative symbol, it is necessary to synchronize with the start of the change of the decorative symbol (the image control command is transmitted immediately), so the lottery is performed in the starting main loop process. It is supposed to do. Further, when the advance notice effect pattern is selected in this advance notice lottery management process, an image control command for instructing the advance notice effect number is generated and set in the image control command buffer of the sub-main information storage means 260. .. Specifically, the command set function "function name: CmdSet" for outside interrupts is called to perform processing (command set processing) for setting an image control command in the image control command buffer.

Next, the device management process is executed (S620). In this device management process, when there is an operation request (lamp request, accessory request) of various devices, an effect number (lamp effect) is selected from a plurality of types of pattern data (lamp pattern, drive pattern) stored in the ROM 203. The pattern data corresponding to the number and the character advance notice production number) is specified, and the control of the target device is started. In the lamp pattern data of the effect lamp LP, the lamp data associated with each frame time (time required to update the image frame once: 16 ms) is stored as schedule data. Layers (details will be described later) are set in this lamp pattern data according to the type of lamp effect. In this example, the one-frame time corresponds to the time required for the drawing process of one frame when drawing at about 60 frames per second (= about 60 fps) on the effect display device 95. Similarly, in the drive pattern data of the effect device, the drive data associated with each interrupt cycle (1 ms) is stored as schedule data. As a result, each control data (lamp data, drive data, etc.) is output to the target device at regular intervals in the effect control side timer interrupt process described later, and the operation of the target device is started. On the other hand, when all the output of a series of control data (lamp data, drive data) is completed in the effect control side timer interrupt process described later, the effect lamp LP is turned off or the operation of the effect device is stopped to be targeted. End control of the device.

In this example, normal lamp effect (managed by this process), premier lamp effect (managed by this process), and error notification lamp effect (managed by the above error effect management process) are prepared as the types of lamp effect. , Layers (layer numbers) are set according to the type of each lamp effect. The layer numbers indicate the order of priority according to the type of lamp effect, and in descending order of priority, error notification lamp effect (layer number 3)> premier lamp effect (layer number 2)> normal lamp effect (layer number 1). ). In this device management process, when two or more lamp requests are made at the same time or at different timings, the corresponding lamp patterns are specified regardless of the layer number, and the lamp patterns are internally based on all the lamp patterns. It is designed to perform control. The normal lamp effect, the premier lamp effect, and the error notification lamp effect have different lighting modes of the effect lamp LP. Further, although detailed description will be omitted, in this device management process (S620), the output control of the sound data for the speaker 8 is also performed according to the sound pattern data associated with each frame time as in the case of the lamp pattern data. The control of the speaker 8 is started and ended.

Subsequently, the command analysis process (S621) is executed. In this command analysis process, it is monitored whether or not the effect control command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260, and if the effect control command is stored, this command is read and the read effect control command is read. Executes the effect control process corresponding to the type of. The details of this command analysis process (S621) will be described later with reference to FIG. 92. Note that this command analysis process (S621) can execute the analysis of a plurality of effect control commands in one main loop, and when the process can be processed within one frame time (16 ms), the effect control of the command storage area Parse commands sequentially. If there is no effect control command in the command storage area, the process is waited for, or the effect lottery random number update process (S623) described later is executed.

Then, it is determined whether or not the command analysis (analysis of the effect control command) is executed during the loop processing this time (S622). Immediately after the command analysis (S622: YES), the process returns to S614 and the process proceeds to the next loop process. On the other hand, when the command analysis is not executed (S622: NO), the effect lottery random number update process is executed (S623). In this effect lottery random number update process, the effect lottery random numbers such as the look-ahead advance notice lottery random number, the decorative symbol random number, the variable effect pattern random number, and the advance notice effect pattern random number are updated. Specifically, the numerical value of each random number counter is added by 1, and when the numerical value exceeds the maximum value, it is returned to the minimum value.

(Command analysis processing)
Next, the command analysis process (S621) will be described. FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing the details of the command analysis process (S621). In this command analysis process, it is monitored whether or not the effect control command from the main control board 100 is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260, and the effect corresponding to the type of the stored effect control command is monitored. Execute control processing.

First, it is determined whether or not the game state designation command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S631). When the game state designation command is stored (step S631: YES), the process proceeds to the effect state transition process (S632). In this effect state transition process (S632), a process of transitioning the effect mode is executed based on the game state information and the variation pattern selection state information included in the game state designation command.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the hold-related command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S633). Here, the hold-related commands include a symbol memory number command and a pre-determination command. When this symbol storage number command is stored (S633: YES), the process proceeds to the hold information management process (S634). In this hold information management process (S634), a symbol storage number command or a pre-determination command is read from the sub-main information storage means 260, and a display mode of the hold image displayed on the hold display units 701 and 702 of the effect display device 95 ( Perform processing to update the number of displayed items).

Next, it is determined whether or not the symbol variation-related command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S635). Here, the symbol fluctuation-related commands include a fluctuation start command and a fluctuation stop command. When the symbol variation-related command is stored (step S635: YES), the process proceeds to the effect content determination process (S636). In this effect content determination process (S636), when the received symbol variation-related command is a variation start command, a process for starting the symbol variation effect is executed, and the received symbol variation-related command is a variation stop command. In that case, a process for terminating the symbol variation effect being executed is executed. The details of this effect content determination process (S636) will be described later with reference to FIG. 93.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the effect-related command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S637). Here, the hit effect-related commands include a hit start demo effect command and a hit end demo effect command. When the hit effect related command is stored (step S637: YES), the process proceeds to the hit effect display setting process (S638) of the big hit effect and the small hit effect. In this hit effect display setting process (S638), a process for executing a big hit start demo effect (small hit start demo effect) or a big hit end demo effect (small hit end demo effect) is performed.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the error effect designation command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S639). When this error effect specification command is stored (S639: YES), the process proceeds to the error effect content determination process (S640). In this error effect content determination process (S640), an error effect designation command is read from the sub-main information storage means 260, and an error effect pattern for notifying the error state by displaying an image of the effect display device 95 is determined. The details of this error effect content determination process (S640) will be described later with reference to FIG. 94.

If the effect control command is not stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S631: NO, S633: NO, S635: NO, S637: NO, S639: NO), the command is analyzed without doing anything. Even when the processing is completed and the analysis of one effect control command is completed, if another effect control command remains in the command storage area, the process is repeated until the predetermined processable limit timing is reached. Performs analysis for the remaining production control commands in.

(Direction content determination process)
Next, the effect content determination process (S636) will be described. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing the details of the effect content determination process (S636).

First, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start command is stored in the sub-main information storage means 260 (S641). When the variation start command is stored (S641: YES), the content of this variation start command (variation pattern specification command, variation addition symbol information specification command, character effect number specification command) is analyzed, and the content of this command is analyzed. As a result of the winning / failing lottery included in, information indicating a symbol group, a fluctuation pattern (variation time), a game state, and the like is acquired (S642). This acquired information is stored in the variation effect content determination area of the sub-main information storage means 260. In addition, as the fluctuation start command, a special symbol winning / failing designation command including information indicating the result of the winning / failing lottery of the special symbol game and a special symbol stopping symbol group designation command including information indicating the result of the symbol lottery of the special symbol game are issued from the main CPU. It may be received and the information contained in the content of this command may be acquired.

Subsequently, the variation effect pattern selection process is executed (S643). In this variation effect pattern selection process, based on the variation pattern information acquired in S642, the variation effect pattern table is acquired, and the variation effect pattern random number value is acquired from the effect lottery random number generation means 210 to obtain a plurality of types of variation effect. From the patterns, one of the variable production patterns is determined by lottery. The variation effect pattern includes the variation mode of the decorative pattern, the type / occurrence time of the reach effect, the type / occurrence time of the advance notice effect, the interrupt timing of the lamp effect (the activation timing of the lamp effect interrupt process), and the voice effect (BGM and sound effect). It constitutes a scenario of the effect display process in which the output timing of the sound effect and the operation timing of the movable effect member are defined. The variation effect pattern number determined here is temporarily stored in the variation effect pattern storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260.

Next, the ramp request function "function name: RampReq" for external interrupt is called to execute the ramp request processing (S644). Here, FIG. 96A is a flowchart showing the details of the lamp request processing (S644) for external interrupts. In the present embodiment, the "function" is a modularization of one or a plurality of processes, and means a subroutine executed by a call instruction or the like.

In this lamp request processing, first, interrupt processing other than receiving the effect control command from the main control board 100 is prohibited (S661). Subsequently, the variation effect pattern number is read out from the variation effect pattern storage area (S662). Then, the lamp effect number corresponding to the variable effect pattern number is requested (S663). The lamp effect selected by this process includes a normal lamp effect selected with a normal frequency and a premier lamp effect selected with a relatively low frequency as compared with the normal lamp effect. This premier lamp production is a special production that suggests, for example, the confirmation of a big hit. Next, the lamp effect number requested in S663 is set in the lamp request storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S664). Therefore, in the subsequent processing, when a numerical value other than 0 is set in the lamp request storage area, it is determined that there is an operation request (lamp request) for the effect lamp LP, and then the processing proceeds. In this example, a plurality of lamp request storage areas are prepared, and a plurality of lamp effect numbers can be set. When multiple lamp effect numbers are set (when there are multiple lamp requests), only the lamp effect with high priority is executed in a manner that the player can see in the layer processing, and the lamp with low priority is executed. As for the production, the processing is only proceeded internally (details will be described later). Then, all interrupts are permitted (S665), the lamp request processing is terminated, and the process returns to the original processing in the main processing.

Next, returning to FIG. 93, the decorative symbol stop symbol selection process is executed (S645). In this decorative symbol stop symbol selection process, a combination of stop symbols (left symbol, middle symbol, right symbol) of the decorative symbol to be finally stopped is drawn by lottery based on the symbol group information and the variation pattern information acquired in S642. decide. The decorative symbol combination number determined here is temporarily stored in the decorative symbol storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260.

Then, an image control command (variation effect start command) required for starting the variation of the decorative symbol is generated, and this image control command is set in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S646). Specifically, a command set function "function name: CmdSet" for outside interrupts is called to perform a process (command set process) of setting an image control command in the image control command buffer of the sub-main information storage means 260.

On the other hand, when the fluctuation start command is not stored (S641: NO), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation stop command is stored in the sub-main information storage means 260 (S647). When the variable stop command is stored (S647: YES), the content of the variable stop command is analyzed and the symbol stop information included in the content of this command is acquired (S648). Then, an image control command (variation effect stop command) required for stopping the fluctuation of the decorative symbol is generated, and this image control command is set in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S649). Specifically, the command set function "function name: CmdSet" for outside interrupts is called to perform processing (command set processing) for setting an image control command in the image control command buffer.

(Error production content determination process)
Next, the error effect content determination process (S640) will be described. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing the details of the error effect content determination process (S640).

First, it is determined whether or not the error effect designation command is stored in the sub-main information storage means 260 (S651). When the error effect designation command is stored (S651: YES), the content of the error effect designation command is analyzed, and the information indicating the error state included in the content of this command is acquired (S652). This acquired information is stored in the error state determination area of the sub-main information storage means 260.

Subsequently, the error effect pattern selection process is executed (S653). In this error effect pattern selection process, the error effect pattern is determined based on the error state information acquired in S652. Information such as an error notification image (for example, a message indicating that an error has occurred), a warning sound from a speaker, and an error notification lighting pattern by an effect lamp is defined in the error effect pattern. The error effect pattern data determined here is temporarily stored in the error effect pattern storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260. When the error effect pattern is set, the initial value (error effect time) is set in the error management timer in the error effect management process (S617), and the error effect management is started. The error management timer is updated by the error management timer update process (S720) described later.

Next, the ramp request function "function name: RampReq" for external interrupt is called to execute the ramp request processing (S654). FIG. 96A is a flowchart showing the details of the lamp request processing (S654) for external interrupts. The lamp request function "RampReq" called in this process is the same as the lamp request function "RampReq" called in the lamp request process (S644) in the above-mentioned effect content determination process (S636). That is, the lamp request process shown in FIG. 96 (A) is a common subroutine between the effect effect content determination process (S636) and the error effect content determination process (S640). Therefore, in the main process, the lamp request process (S644, S654) is performed by one common module. In this lamp request function "RampReq", all interrupts (other than the effect control command reception interrupt processing) are prohibited at the start of processing, and all interrupts are allowed at the end of processing. This is to prevent a failure (for example, a failure in which status management becomes complicated) due to the activation of interrupt processing (lamp effect interrupt processing described later) and the generation of a plurality of lamp requests at the same time.

In this lamp request processing, first, interrupt processing other than receiving the effect control command from the main control board 100 is prohibited (S661). Subsequently, the error effect pattern number is read out from the error effect pattern storage area (S662). Then, the lamp effect number corresponding to the error effect pattern number is requested (S663). In this process, only the error notification lamp effect for notifying the error state of the gaming machine is requested. Next, the lamp effect number selected in S663 is set in the lamp request storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S664). Then, all interrupts are permitted (S665), the lamp request processing is terminated, and the process returns to the original processing in the main processing.

Subsequently, returning to FIG. 94, an image control command (error effect start command) required for error effect is generated, and this image control command is set in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S655). Specifically, the command set function "function name: CmdSet" for outside interrupts is called to perform processing (command set processing) for setting an image control command in the image control command buffer.

In the present embodiment, instead of making all the lamp requests in the main process (in the command analysis process) described above, the lamp effect interrupt process may be activated at a predetermined trigger to make the lamp request. That is, the time schedule of the variation effect pattern selected in S643 defines the trigger (interrupt timing) of the lamp effect interrupt process in relation to the advance notice effect that occurs at each stage of the variation effect process of the decorative symbol. ing. When this interrupt timing arrives, the lamp effect interrupt process is activated and the process of requesting the lamp effect number is executed. The time when the lamp effect interrupt process occurs is synchronized with the time when a specific notice effect (for example, when the lamp of a color related to the content of the notice effect is turned on) occurs.

《Lamp production interrupt processing》
Next, the lamp effect interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing the lamp effect interrupt process. This lamp effect interrupt process is generated by a software interrupt when the interrupt timing specified in the variation effect pattern arrives.

First, in this lamp effect interrupt process, interrupts of priority level 2 or higher, such as an effect control command reception interrupt from the main control board 100 and a watchdog timer interrupt, are permitted (S671). Subsequently, the ramp request function "function name: RampReq_InINT" for the inside of the interrupt is called to execute the ramp request processing (S672). FIG. 96B is a flowchart showing the ramp request processing (S672) for interrupts. Note that this ramp request function (RampReq_InINT) differs from the ramp request function "RampReq" called in the above-mentioned main process in that interrupt disable / enable instructions are not set at the beginning and end of the process. This is because, as described above, the generation of other interrupts having the same priority level or a lower priority level is prohibited in each interrupt processing, so that other lamp requests are duplicated during this lamp request processing. Because there is no.

In this lamp request processing, the advance notice effect pattern is read out with reference to the advance notice effect pattern storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S681). Then, the lamp effect number corresponding to this notice effect pattern is requested (S682). For example, when the advance notice effect is a background advance notice, if the advance notice effect pattern for displaying the blue background is selected in the advance notice lottery management process, the lamp effect (lamp effect number) for lighting the effect lamp LP in blue. ) Is requested. Subsequently, the lamp effect number is set in the lamp request storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S683). Therefore, in the subsequent processing, when a numerical value other than 0 is set in the lamp request storage area, it is determined that there is an operation request (lamp request) for the effect lamp LP, and then the processing proceeds. Then, the lamp effect interrupt process is terminated, and the process returns to the original process before the interrupt occurred.

<< Reception interrupt processing of production control command >>
Next, the reception interrupt processing of the effect control command will be described. FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing the reception interrupt processing of the effect control command. As described above, the reception interrupt processing of this effect control command is started by generating an interrupt based on the input of the strobe signal from the main control board 100, and various effect control commands are acquired in this interrupt processing. It has become like. The effect control command has a configuration including 1-byte MODE data and 1-byte EVENT data, and is transmitted from the main control board 100 to the effect control board 200 in the order of MODE data and EVENT data. Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, the MODE data will be referred to as a “first command”, and the EVENT data will be referred to as a “second command”.

First, when an interrupt based on the strobe signal from the main control board 100 occurs, it is determined whether or not the input value of the effect control command is fixed (S701). Specifically, the input value is fixed when the command data is read up to 5 times and the same value is read twice in a row. This is because the reading of the effect control command may fail due to noise or the like, and the input value is not fixed until the same value is read twice in succession.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the command received this time is the first command (MODE), in other words, whether it is the first command (MODE) or the second command (EVENT) (S702). When the command received this time is the first command (S702: YES), the first command is temporarily stored in the temporary area (S703). Then, the effect lottery random number is acquired from the effect lottery random number generation means 210, and this random number information is temporarily stored in the effect lottery random number storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S704). It should be noted that the production lottery random number is acquired when the production control command is received, because the production control command is transmitted at a physically irregular timing such as when the game ball starts winning a prize or when the special symbol changes. Therefore, by taking this as an opportunity, it is necessary to prevent the periodicity from appearing at the acquisition time. By making the acquisition time of the random number of the production lottery irregular in this way, inconveniences such as the same production being unnaturally and repeatedly selected in various production lottery are less likely to occur.

On the other hand, when the command received this time is the second command (S702: NO), it is determined whether or not the first command has already been received (S705). That is, it is determined whether or not the effect control command is received in the order of the first command (MODE) → the second command (EVENT), and it is confirmed whether or not there is a contradiction in the combination of the effect control commands. If there is no contradiction in the combination of the effect control commands (S705: YES), the address indicated by the write pointer (pointer for writing) is acquired (S706). Subsequently, the first command and the second command are stored in the effect control command buffer (ring buffer) of the sub-main information storage means 260 according to the address indicated by the write pointer (S707). The saved command data is read out in the command analysis process (S621) in the main process, and the effect control process corresponding to the type of effect control command is executed. Next, the address indicated by the write pointer is updated (S708). Further, the command data (first command) temporarily stored in S708 is cleared (S709).

<< Effect control side timer interrupt processing >>
Next, the timer interrupt processing on the effect control side will be described. FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing the effect control side timer interrupt processing. This timer interrupt process is activated by a clock pulse at regular time intervals and is executed in the form of interrupting the above-mentioned effect control side main process.

When a timer interrupt occurs, the contents of the registers in the sub-main CPU 201 are saved in the stack area of the RAM 203, and then the processes after S711 are sequentially executed. In this timer interrupt process, interrupts of priority level 2 or higher, such as an effect control command reception interrupt from the main control board 100 and a watchdog timer interrupt, are permitted (S711).

Subsequently, the port input / output process is executed (S712). In this port input / output processing, input processing and output processing of port data in the I / O port circuit 204 are performed. In the input process, various signals input to the I / O port circuit 204 (input port) are read and stored as input information. In the output process, various control signals (motor control signals) temporarily stored in the sub-main information storage means 260 are read out and output from the I / O port circuit 204 (output port). In the I / O port circuit 204, an input port is provided to which a power supply cutoff signal indicating that the power supply voltage from the power supply board 450 has dropped to a predetermined value or less is input. When a power-off signal is input, as a power-off processing, a process for saving various data at the time of power-off occurrence in the backup area of the RAM 203 is performed. After that, since the backup power supply is supplied from the backup power supply circuit of the power supply board 450, the stored contents of the RAM 203 are retained without being lost even after the power supply is turned off. In addition, as other power-off processing, each effect device (upper effect device 500, lower left effect device 600, upper left effect device 7).
By turning off the excitation of the motor M, which is the drive source of 00, the right side effect device 800, and the lower side effect device 900) (non-energized state), the operation of each effect device in an unstable state such as a power failure occurs at an early stage. To enable the initial operation without any abnormality after the power is turned off and restored. The stop position of each effect device is held by the detent torque when the power is not applied.

Subsequently, the device control data output process is executed (S713). In this device control data output process, the drive data for a predetermined time is read from the drive pattern data specified in the device management process (S620) and set in the drive data storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260. The drive data set in this process is data indicating control for 1 ms corresponding to the interrupt cycle. When the drive data is set in this process, the drive data is output from the I / O port circuit 204 (output port) to the motor driver 92 in the next timer interrupt process. Therefore, in this device control data output process, the drive data can be switched every interrupt period (1 ms) according to the drive pattern data. The details of this device control data output process (S713) will be described later with reference to FIG. 100.

Next, the effect timer update process is executed (S714). In this effect timer update process, the values of various effect timers used for the effect operation control are subtracted and updated by interrupt period (1 ms in this embodiment). The effect timer includes a timer for managing the fluctuation time of the decorative symbol, a timer for managing the occurrence timing of the advance notice effect, and the like. The effect timer manages the time schedule in the variable effect pattern, and manages the time such as the drive timing of the motor M of each effect device and the lighting timing of the effect lamp LP on the time axis. The effect timer is also used in the device control data output process (S713) and the lamp data update process (S717) in the effect control timer interrupt process.

Subsequently, the button control timer update process is executed (S715). The value of the effective time management timer for managing the operation effective time of the effect button 10 is subtracted and updated by the interrupt cycle (1 ms in this embodiment). The operation effective time is a time during which the operation input of the effect button 10 is effective.

Next, the image control command setting process is executed (S716). In this image control command setting process, one or more selected in the advance notice lottery management process (S619) when the occurrence timing of the advance notice effect arrives in the effect timer of the effect timer update process (S714). When a specific advance notice effect pattern is included in the advance notice effect pattern, an image control command for instructing the specific advance notice effect number is generated, and this is used as an image control command buffer of the sub-main information storage means 260. Set to. Specifically, the command set function "function name: CmdSet_InINT" for the interrupt is called to perform the process of setting the image control command in the image control command buffer (command set process). Here, the specific advance notice effect pattern includes, for example, an effect pattern for displaying an effect image on the effect display device 95 at the timing when the effect button 10 is pressed, or an effect for displaying an effect image according to the operation of each effect device. Patterns etc. are included.

Subsequently, the task control counter update process is executed (S717). In this task control counter update process, the task counter values (“0” to “15”) are updated for each timer interrupt. Specifically, if the value of the task counter is "0" to "14", it is incremented by 1, and if the value of the task counter becomes "15", it is returned to "0". That is, this task counter can have a circulation cycle of 16 ms. Then, various tasks (task processing) are assigned according to the value of the task counter updated this time, and the lamp control task (lamp data update processing of S718) and runaway monitoring are assigned according to the value of the task counter. Each process such as a task (image CPU runaway monitoring process of S719) and an error management task (error management timer update process of S720) is executed. In this example, one of the task counter values ("0" to "15") is assigned to the lamp control task, and the other two values (values that are 8 ms apart from each other) are for runaway monitoring. It is assigned to a task and one other value is assigned to the error management task (the description of the other tasks is omitted). As described above, the reason why the circulation cycle of the task counter is set to 16 ms is to match with the minimum unit (16 ms) of the switching control of the effect lamp LP. The minimum unit (16 ms) of the switching control of the effect lamp LP corresponds to one frame time of the image frame, and the synchronization between the image effect and the lamp effect is realized.

Subsequently, the lamp data update process is executed (S718). In this lamp data update process, the lamp data for a predetermined time is read out from the lamp pattern data specified in the device management process (S620) or the error effect management process (S617) and set. The lamp data set in this process is data indicating lighting control for 16 ms, which is the minimum unit of switching control of the effect lamp LP. When the lamp data is set, the lamp data is automatically output from the output port (serial port) to the lamp connection board 291 by serial transfer. This lamp data output processing is configured as a serial communication interrupt processing, and is realized by sequentially writing the lamp data to the transmission buffer of the serial communication circuit 205. The serial communication circuit 205 serially converts the lamp data of the transmission buffer in 1-byte units and outputs each bit to the lamp connection board 291 in a form synchronized with the serial clock. This process is repeated until the transmission buffer becomes empty, so that all the lamp data (all bytes) stored in the transmission buffer are output. Therefore, in this lamp data update process, the lamp data is switched every one frame time (16 ms) according to the lamp pattern, and the lamp data is output to the lamp connection board 291 by serial transfer. The lamp data update process is executed when the task counter value reaches a predetermined value (value indicating a lamp control task) in the task control counter update process (S717) (that is, is executed at a cycle of 16 ms). Processing to be performed).

Here, as described above, in the present embodiment, layers are set according to the type of each lamp effect (normal lamp effect, premier lamp effect, error notification lamp effect), and a plurality of lamp requests of different types are set. If there is, only the lamp data set in the upper layer (higher priority layer) is output, while the output of the lamp data set in the lower layer (lower priority layer) is prohibited. However, the lamp data switching process (switching process every 16 ms) itself is not stopped, so when the processing of the upper layer is completed, the lower layer maintains continuity with the processing in the layer. The lamp data set in the layer of is output (the lamp effect related to the lower layer is generated). In order to output only the lamp data related to the upper (highest priority) layer in the lamp data update process (S718), if the lamp data related to a plurality of layers is superimposed, the lighting is generally irregular and uncomfortable. This is because it may become a pattern. In addition, the reason why the premier lamp production is distinguished from the normal lamp production by the layer structure and the priority is different is that the appearance rate of the premier lamp production is generally lower than that of the normal lamp production, but the appearance timing is regular. Since it occurs at random timing without any, the appearance of the premier lamp effect selected later is reserved due to the existence of the normal lamp effect selected in advance, so the player's expectation for the occurrence of the premier lamp effect This is because the feeling is diminished.

Subsequently, the image CPU runaway monitoring process is executed (S719). In this image CPU runaway monitoring process, the toggle signal input from the image control board 300 is monitored, and when the toggle signal does not change continuously for 1600 ms (about 50 to 100 frames), the image control board 300 It is determined that the sub-sub CPU 301 of the above is out of control, and a reset signal is transmitted from the effect control board 200 to the image control board 300. As a result, the image control board 300 side executes a predetermined reset process when the reset state of the sub-sub CPU 301 occurs. The toggle signal is a signal having a waveform in which H level / L level is alternately repeated every frame time.

Next, the error management timer update process is executed (S720). In this error management timer update process, the value of the error effect timer for managing the error effect time set in the error effect management process (S617) is subtracted and updated. The error management timer update process is a process executed when the value of the task counter becomes a predetermined value (value indicating an error management task) in the task control counter update process (S717). Therefore, even if the error effect time is long, the time is counted by the timer having a 16 ms cycle, so that the amount of data can be increased as compared with the case where the time is counted every timer interrupt cycle (1 ms). It can be mitigated. Then, after enabling all interrupts and restoring the saved register contents, the effect control side timer interrupt process is terminated and the process returns to the original process before the interrupt occurred.

(Device control data output processing)
Next, the device control data output process (S713) will be described. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing details of the device control data output process (S713).

First, the sensor input check process is executed (S731). In this sensor input check process, each effect device (upper effect device 500, lower left side) is based on the input information of the position detection sensor stored in the port input / output process (S712) for each timer interrupt cycle (1 ms). The states of all the position detection sensors (initial position sensor, intermediate position sensor, and movable position sensor) in the effect device 600, the upper left effect device 700, the right effect device 800, and the lower effect device 900) are confirmed. At this time, the detection state by each position detection sensor is held by a number for each movable effect member (drive motor) provided in each effect device.

For example, "0" is set as a number corresponding to the state in which the first and second upper support portions 521, 531 (first upper effect member 571) of the upper effect device 500 are detected by the upper initial position sensor 516a. "1" is set as a number corresponding to the state in which the first and second upper support portions 521 and 531 are detected by the upper intermediate position sensor 516b. "2" is set as a number corresponding to the state in which the first and second upper support portions 521 and 531 are detected by the upper movable position sensor 516c. That is, "0" is set as a number corresponding to the state in which the effect member is detected by the initial position sensor. "1" is set as a number corresponding to the state in which the effect member is detected by the intermediate position sensor. "2" is set as a number corresponding to the state in which the effect member is detected by the movable position sensor. For all the position detection sensors in each effect device, "0" is set as the number when the position detection sensor is in the non-detection state, and "1" is set as the number when the position detection sensor is in the detection state. The operation of the movable effect member may be controlled based on the obtained data.

In this sensor input check process (S731), when it is confirmed that the position detection sensor has switched from the non-detection state to the detection state, the effect member corresponding to the position detection sensor that has switched from the non-detection state to the detection state is concerned with the effect member. The counter value (number of steps) of the operation pulse of the drive motor that moves the motor is reset. Specifically, when the sensor detection unit provided in the effect device blocks the light receiving unit of the position detection sensor, and the running operation pattern (drive pattern data of the drive motor) detects the position of the counter value of the operation pulse. The counter value of the operation pulse is reset when it corresponds to the monitored pattern data that executes the correction based on the sensor. The reason for separating the monitored pattern data and the other data is that it is possible to prevent the counter value setting of the operation pulse from being changed unnecessarily. As an example of the pattern data to be monitored, the drive pattern data when the effect member is repeatedly reciprocated can be mentioned. Although it is not the pattern data to be monitored by the position detection sensor, it is possible to stabilize the operation of the effect device by adopting the control that prevents the counter value of the operation pulse from being reset by the detection of the position detection sensor. become.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, each position detection sensor of the present embodiment is an optical sensor having a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit, and the sensor detection unit provided in each effect device starts shading the light receiving unit. At that time (in the case of so-called rising edge detection), it is determined that the effect member (sensor detection unit) has been detected by the position detection sensor. Further, the counter value of the operation pulse of the drive motor indicates the drive amount of the movable effect member on which the operation pattern is executed, and is data for grasping the current position of the effect member in a software manner. The counter value of the operation pulse of the drive motor is stored in the position information storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 as position information for grasping the current position of the effect member. In the actual operation of the effect member, the position information of the effect member managed by the CPU for effect control may be out of alignment with the position information of the effect member based on uncertain factors such as step-out of the drive motor. is there. Therefore, the position information of the effect member managed by software is corrected at the timing when the position of the effect member can be physically specified, that is, the timing detected by each position detection sensor. As a result, it becomes possible to execute accurate operation control of the movable effect device, and it is possible to prevent problems such as failure due to contact with other effect members. The counter value of the operation pulse of the drive motor may be added or subtracted in the interrupt process in which the operation pulse is output, depending on the rotation direction of the drive motor. For example, when the drive motor rotates in the forward direction, "+1" is counted (added), and when the drive motor rotates in the reverse direction, "-1" is counted (subtracted). Further, for example, depending on the excitation method of the drive motor (1-phase excitation, 1-2-phase excitation, 2-phase excitation), "+1" (or "-1"), "+2" (or "-2") and the addition amount (or "-2") The amount of subtraction) may be different. In this way, the drive pattern data of the drive motor includes the step switching between the case of 2-phase excitation and the case where the operating amount is half that of 2-phase excitation such as 1-2-phase excitation and 1-phase excitation. With respect to the movable effect device that may operate, the position information of the effect member can be grasped by the counter value of the operation pulse.

Here, a first setting example of the counter value of the operation pulse of the drive motor will be described. FIG. 106 schematically shows the relationship between the counter values of the operation pulses when the initial position sensor, the intermediate position sensor, and the movable position sensor are provided. In the present embodiment, the upper support portion drive motor 505 of the upper effect device 500 provided with the upper initial position sensor 516a, the upper intermediate position sensor 516b, and the upper movable position sensor 516c, the rotation initial position sensor 533a, and the rotation intermediate position sensor 533b. , And the display device drive motor 534 of the upper effect device 500 provided with the rotary movable position sensor 553c, this setting example can be applied. In the following description, the rotation direction of the drive motor that moves the effect member from the initial position to the movable position is defined as the normal rotation direction.

In FIG. 106, SP1 is a counter value (number of steps) of the operation pulse of the drive motor corresponding to the amount of displacement from the initial position to the limited position (in the direction beyond the initial position) by the mechanical stopper portion. SP2 is a counter value (counter value) of the operation pulse of the drive motor corresponding to the displacement amount from the sensor detection unit starting to block light from the light receiving portion of the initial position sensor to the initial position (the effect member) when the drive motor is reversed. The number of steps). SP3 is a drive motor operation pulse corresponding to the amount of displacement from when the sensor detection unit finishes shading the light receiving part of the initial position sensor to when the light receiving part of the intermediate position sensor starts shading when the drive motor rotates in the normal direction. It is a counter value (number of steps). In SP4, the counter value of the operation pulse of the drive motor corresponding to the displacement amount from when the sensor detection unit starts shading the light receiving part of the intermediate position sensor to when the effect member reaches the intermediate position when the drive motor rotates in the normal direction. (Number of steps). SP5 is a counter value (counter value) of the operation pulse of the drive motor corresponding to the amount of displacement from when the sensor detection unit starts shading the light receiving part of the intermediate position sensor to the intermediate position (the effect member) when the drive motor is reversed. The number of steps). SP6 is a drive motor operation pulse corresponding to the amount of displacement from when the sensor detection unit finishes shading the light receiving part of the intermediate position sensor to when the light receiving part of the movable position sensor starts shading when the drive motor rotates in the normal direction. It is a counter value (number of steps). SP7 is a counter value of the operation pulse of the drive motor corresponding to the amount of displacement from when the sensor detection unit starts shading the light receiving part of the movable position sensor when the drive motor rotates in the normal direction until the (effect member) reaches the movable position. (Number of steps). SP8 is a counter value (number of steps) of the operation pulse of the drive motor corresponding to the amount of displacement from the movable position to the limited position (in the direction exceeding the movable position) by the mechanical stopper portion.

The counter value (number of steps) of the operation pulse of the drive motor corresponding to the initial position, the intermediate position, and the movable position is set when the effect member is located at the initial position as the initial value, and when the drive motor rotates forward and reverse. Set to a different value. The counter value of the operation pulse when correcting the position information of the effect member at the start of detection of each position detection sensor (at the start of shading of the sensor) is also set to a different value at the time of normal rotation and the time of reverse rotation of the drive motor. For example, at the time of normal rotation of the drive motor, a predetermined initial value (for example, zero value or dummy data) is set as the counter value (number of steps) of the operation pulse of the drive motor corresponding to the initial position. At the time of normal rotation of the drive motor, a counter value of SP2 + SP3 is set as the counter value (number of steps) of the operation pulse of the drive motor corresponding to the intermediate position. When the drive motor rotates in the normal direction, the counter value (number of steps) of the operation pulse of the drive motor corresponding to the movable position is set to a counter value of SP2 + SP3 + SP4 + SP5 + SP6. When the drive motor is reversed, a counter value of SP2 is set as the counter value (number of steps) of the operation pulse of the drive motor corresponding to the initial position. When the drive motor is reversed, the counter value (number of steps) of the operation pulse of the drive motor corresponding to the intermediate position is set to a counter value of SP2 + SP3 + SP4 + SP5. When the drive motor is reversed, a predetermined set value (for example, a counter value or dummy data such as SP2 + SP3 + SP4 + SP5 + SP6 + SP7) is set as the counter value (number of steps) of the operation pulse of the drive motor corresponding to the movable position.

In this way, the reason why different correction values (of the counter value of the operation pulse) are set at the start of detection of the same position detection sensor when the drive motor rotates forward and reverse is the correction of the position information of the effect member. As the timing, it is easy to acquire the timing at which the position detection sensor switches from the non-detection state to the detection state (the timing at which the end of the sensor detection unit starts shading the light receiving portion of the position detection sensor) as input information, and the sensor detection unit can obtain it. It can be mentioned that it is a member having a physical width. Even if the position information of the effect member is corrected at the timing when the position detection sensor switches from the detection state to the non-detection state, the processing is the same. However, after the effect member reaches the initial position (or the intermediate position or the movable position), the effect member moves until the light receiving portion of the position detection sensor is not shielded from light. It may be difficult to determine whether or not it is located in the intermediate position or movable position). Therefore, it can be said that the present embodiment in which the position information of the effect member is corrected at the timing when the position detection sensor switches from the non-detection state to the detection state is more preferable. Further, in the present embodiment, after the position detection sensor detects that the effect member has moved to the initial position or the movable position, the effect member physically moves to the initial position or the movable position. As the counter value of the operation pulse, the counter values SP2 and SP7 of the operation pulse from when the sensor detection unit starts shading the light receiving part of the initial position sensor and the movable position sensor to when the effect member reaches the initial position and the movable position. In addition, the counter values SP1 and SP8 of the operation pulse until the effect member comes into contact with the mechanical stopper portion are set. Thereby, the position control of the effect member can be stabilized, which is a more preferable embodiment, but it is also possible not to set the counter values SP1 and SP8 of the operation pulse until the effect member abuts on the mechanical stopper portion. Is.

Next, a second setting example of the counter value of the operation pulse of the drive motor will be described. FIG. 107 schematically shows the relationship between the counter values of the operation pulses when the initial position sensor and the movable position sensor are provided. In the present embodiment, this setting example can be applied to the upper effect unit drive motor 538 of the upper effect device 500 provided with the proximity initial position sensor 558a and the separable movable position sensor 558c. The lower left back side drive motor 603 of the lower left side effect device 600 provided with the lower left back side initial position sensor 605a and the lower left back side movable position sensor 605c, and the lower left side effect device provided with the left side standing initial position sensor 636a and the left side tilting movable position sensor 636c. This setting example can be applied to the lower left front drive motor 637 of 600. The upper left back side drive motor 703 of the upper left side effect device 700 provided with the upper left back side initial position sensor 705a and the upper left back side movable position sensor 705c, and the upper left side effect provided with the upper initial position sensor (not shown) and the lower upper movable position sensor 736c. This setting example can be applied to the upper left front side drive motor 737 of the device 700.

The lower right back side drive motor 803 of the right side effect device 800 provided with the lower right back side initial position sensor 805a and the lower right back side movable position sensor 805c, and the right side effect device provided with the upper right back side initial position sensor 810a and the upper right back side movable position sensor 810c. This setting example can be applied to the upper right back side drive motor 808 of the 800 and the lower right front side drive motor 867 of the right side effect device 800 provided with the right side standing initial position sensor 866a and the right side tilting movable position sensor 866c. .. The movable support drive motor 904 of the lower effect device 900 provided with the lower initial position sensor 908a and the lower movable position sensor 908c, and the lower side provided with the first back side initial position sensor 936a and the first back side movable position sensor 936c. This setting example is applied to the back side rotation drive motor 934 of the effect device 900 and the front side drive motor 967 of the lower effect device 900 provided with the first front side initial position sensor 969a and the first front side movable position sensor 969c. Can be done.

In FIG. 107, SP11 is a counter value (number of steps) of the operation pulse of the drive motor corresponding to the amount of displacement from the initial position to the limited position (in the direction beyond the initial position) by the mechanical stopper portion. The SP12 has a counter value (counter value) of the operation pulse of the drive motor corresponding to the amount of displacement from the sensor detection unit starting to block light from the light receiving unit of the initial position sensor to the initial position (the effect member) when the drive motor is reversed. The number of steps). The SP13 is a drive motor operation pulse corresponding to the amount of displacement from when the sensor detection unit finishes shading the light receiving part of the initial position sensor to when the light receiving part of the movable position sensor starts shading when the drive motor rotates in the normal direction. It is a counter value (number of steps). In SP14, the counter value of the operation pulse of the drive motor corresponding to the displacement amount from when the sensor detection unit starts shading the light receiving part of the movable position sensor when the drive motor rotates in the normal direction until the (effect member) reaches the movable position. (Number of steps). SP15 is a counter value (number of steps) of the operation pulse of the drive motor corresponding to the amount of displacement from the movable position to the restricted position (in the direction exceeding the movable position) by the mechanical stopper portion.

The counter value (number of steps) of the operation pulse of the drive motor corresponding to the initial position and the movable position is set to a different value when the drive motor rotates forward and reverse, with the case where the effect member is located at the initial position as the initial value. Will be done. The counter value of the operation pulse when correcting the position information of the effect member at the start of detection of each position detection sensor (at the start of shading of the sensor) is also set to a different value at the time of normal rotation and the time of reverse rotation of the drive motor. For example, at the time of normal rotation of the drive motor, a predetermined initial value (for example, zero value or dummy data) is set as the counter value (number of steps) of the operation pulse of the drive motor corresponding to the initial position. When the drive motor rotates in the normal direction, the counter value (number of steps) of the operation pulse of the drive motor corresponding to the movable position is set to a counter value of SP12 + SP13. When the drive motor is reversed, a counter value of SP12 is set as the counter value (number of steps) of the operation pulse of the drive motor corresponding to the initial position. When the drive motor is reversed, a predetermined set value (for example, a counter value or dummy data such as SP12 + SP13 + SP14) is set as the counter value (number of steps) of the operation pulse of the drive motor corresponding to the movable position.

Returning to FIG. 100, after executing the sensor input check process (S731), the first accessory control process is executed (S732). In this first accessory control process (S732), when the operation of the first and second upper support portions 521, 531 (first upper effect member 571) of the upper effect device 500 is requested, the upper support portion drive motor 505 Performs the process of updating the drive data of. The drive pattern data of the upper support portion drive motor 505 is configured to be able to execute an operation according to four types of operation tables shown in FIGS. 110 (A) to 110 (D), for example. The four types of operation tables shown in FIGS. 110A to 110D are selected according to the content of the operation request for the first and second upper support portions 521 and 531. In the operation table shown in FIGS. 110 (A) to 110 (D), (+) of the "operation" item indicates that the rotation direction of the drive motor is the normal rotation direction, and (-) of the "operation" item is. Indicates that the rotation direction of the drive motor is the reverse direction.

The operation table shown in FIG. 110 (A) is an operation table for moving the first and second upper support portions 521 and 531 of the upper effect device 500 from the upper initial position to the upper movable position (hereinafter, for convenience, the operation table for the upper movable position). It is composed of the first to eighth processing tables TA1 to TA8. According to the first to eighth processing tables TA1 to TA8, the upper support portion drive motor 505 accelerates the first and second upper support portions 521 and 531 from the upper initial position to the upper movable position to a constant speed state (first). When the sensor detection unit 524 of the first upper support portion 521 is detected by the upper movable position sensor 516c, the first and second upper support portions 521 and 531 are moved to the first and third processing tables TA1 to TA3). It is controlled to decelerate, hold the excitation, and stop at the upper movable position (corresponding to the fourth to eighth processing tables TA4 to TA8).

In the operation table for the upper movable position, in the first to second processing tables TA1 to TA2 and the fourth to sixth processing tables TA4 to TA6, once for each X interrupt according to the "frequency" of each table. When the drive data of the upper support unit drive motor 505 is updated and the drive data is updated (outputs an operation pulse) as many times as the "number of steps" of each table, the process of moving to the next processing table is performed. Note that once in X interrupts is, for example, in the case of the first processing table TA1, the "frequency" is 250 [pps (pulse per second)], and the interrupt cycle of the effect control side timer interrupt processing is 1. Since it is [ms] (1000 interrupts per second), the output of the operation pulse is once for every four interrupts (one step update, one excitation phase update). In the third processing table TA3 in the operation table for the upper movable position, the drive data of the upper support drive motor 505 is input once for each X (twice) interrupt according to the "frequency (500 [pps])". When the upper movable position sensor 516c is updated and the upper movable position sensor 516c is switched from the non-detection state to the detection state, the process of shifting to the next processing table is performed. The "number of steps (N)" in the third processing table TA3 indicates that the number of steps is indefinite.

As described above, the operation table for the upper movable position includes a processing table in which the processing is completed when the operation pulse is transmitted to the upper support portion drive motor 505 by a predetermined number of steps, and the first and second upper support portions 521 and 531. Includes a processing table that ends processing when is moved to the detection position of the upper movable position sensor 516c. The number of times the drive data is updated according to the "number of steps" in each table is counted as a counter value (number of steps) of the operation pulse of the corresponding drive motor (upper support drive motor 505).

The operation table shown in FIG. 110 (B) is an operation table for moving the first and second upper support portions 521 and 531 of the upper effect device 500 from the upper initial position to the upper intermediate position (hereinafter, for convenience, the operation table for the upper intermediate position). It is composed of the first to seventh processing tables TB1 to TB7. According to the first to seventh processing tables TB1 to TB7, the upper support portion drive motor 505 accelerates the first and second upper support portions 521 and 531 from the upper initial position to the upper intermediate position to a constant speed state (first). 1st to 3rd processing tables TB1 to
When the sensor detection unit 524 of the first upper support portion 521 is detected by the upper intermediate position sensor 516b, the first and second upper support portions 521 and 531 are decelerated to be excited and held, and the upper intermediate is held. It is controlled to perform an operation of stopping at a position (corresponding to the fourth to seventh processing tables TB4 to TB7).

In the operation table for the upper intermediate position, in the first to second processing tables TB1 to TB2 and the fourth to fifth processing tables TB4 to TB5, once for each X interrupt according to the "frequency" of each table. When the drive data of the upper support unit drive motor 505 is updated and the drive data is updated as many times as the "number of steps" of each table, the process of moving to the next processing table is performed. In the third processing table TB3 in the operation table for the upper intermediate position, the drive data of the upper support drive motor 505 is input once for each X (twice) interrupt according to the "frequency (500 [pps])". When the upper intermediate position sensor 516b is updated and the upper intermediate position sensor 516b is switched from the non-detection state to the detection state, the process of shifting to the next processing table is performed. As described above, the operation table for the upper intermediate position includes a processing table in which the processing is completed when the operation pulses are transmitted to the upper support portion drive motor 505 by a predetermined number of steps, and the first and second upper support portions 521 and 531. Includes a processing table in which processing ends when is moved to the detection position of the upper intermediate position sensor 516b.

In the sixth processing table TB6, like the other processing tables (for example, the seventh processing table TA7 in the operation table for the upper movable position), the first and second upper support portions 521 and 531 due to the inertial force In order to completely stop the operation, unlike the drive pattern in which the upper support drive motor 505 performs an excitation holding operation of 100 [ms], the upper support drive motor has a maximum time of 10 [s] to maintain the excitation holding. 505 performs the excitation holding operation. This is because when the first and second upper support portions 521 and 531 are located at the upper intermediate positions, they are not subjected to the holding force by the mechanical stopper portion or the like, and the first and second upper support portions 521, 531 are opposed to gravity. This is to hold. The maximum time for maintaining the excitation holding is 10 [s] because the time to be maintained differs depending on the variation effect pattern.

The operation table shown in FIG. 110 (C) may be referred to as an operation table for returning the first and second upper support portions 521 and 531 of the upper effect device 500 to the upper initial position (hereinafter, for convenience, the operation table for the upper initial position). ), And is composed of the first to eighth processing tables TC1 to TC8. According to the first to eighth processing tables TC1 to TC8, the upper support portion drive motor 505 accelerates the first and second upper support portions 521 and 531 from the upper movable position (or the upper intermediate position) to the upper initial position. When the speed is set to a constant speed state (corresponding to the first to third processing tables TC1 to TC3) and the sensor detection unit 524 of the first upper support portion 521 is detected by the upper initial position sensor 516a, the first and second upper sides are set. The support portions 521 and 531 are controlled to be decelerated, excited and held, and stopped at the upper initial position (corresponding to the fourth to eighth processing tables TC4 to TC8).

In the first to second processing tables TC1 to TC2 and the fourth to sixth processing tables TC4 to TC6 in the operation table for the upper initial position, once for each X interrupt according to the "frequency" of each table. When the drive data of the upper support unit drive motor 505 is updated and the drive data is updated as many times as the "number of steps" of each table, the process of moving to the next processing table is performed. In the third processing table TC3 in the operation table for the upper initial position, the drive data of the upper support drive motor 505 is input once for X (4 times) interrupts according to the "frequency (250 [pps])". When the upper initial position sensor 516a is updated and the upper initial position sensor 516a is switched from the non-detection state to the detection state, the process of shifting to the next processing table is performed. As described above, the operation table for the upper initial position includes a processing table in which the processing is completed when the operation pulses are transmitted to the upper support portion drive motor 505 by a predetermined number of steps, and the first and second upper support portions 521 and 531. Includes a processing table in which processing ends when is moved to the detection position of the upper initial position sensor 516a.

The operation table shown in FIG. 110 (D) is an operation table for reciprocating the first and second upper support portions 521 and 531 of the upper effect device 500 between the vicinity of the upper initial position and the upper intermediate position (hereinafter, for convenience). It is sometimes referred to as an operation table for reciprocating operation), and is composed of first to 22nd processing tables TD1 to TD22. According to the first to sixth processing tables TD1 to TD6, the upper support portion drive motor 505 accelerates the first and second upper support portions 521 and 531 from the upper initial position to the upper movable position to a constant speed state (first). When the sensor detection unit 524 of the first upper support portion 521 is detected by the upper initial position sensor 516a and passes through the upper initial position sensor 516a, the first and third processing tables TD1 to TD3 are set. 2 The upper support portions 521 and 531 are controlled to be decelerated to perform an operation of exciting holding (corresponding to the fourth to sixth processing tables TD4 to TD6).

Subsequently, according to the 7th to 14th processing tables TD7 to TD14, the upper support portion drive motor 505 accelerates the first and second upper support portions 521 and 531 toward the upper initial position to bring them into a constant speed state. The operation of decelerating the 1st and 2nd upper support portions 521 and 531 to hold the excitation (corresponding to the 7th to 10th processing tables TD7 to TD10) and the upper movable position of the 1st and 2nd upper support portions 521 and 531. The operation of accelerating to a constant speed state, decelerating the first and second upper support portions 521, 531 and holding the excitation (corresponding to the 11th to 14th processing tables TD11 to TD14) was set. It is controlled to repeat the number of times. Then, according to the 15th to 22nd processing tables TC15 to TC22, the upper support portion drive motor 505 accelerates the first and second upper support portions 521 and 531 toward the upper initial position to be in a constant speed state (15th to 22nd). The 17th processing table (corresponding to TD15 to TD17) is set, and when the sensor detection unit 524 of the first upper support portion 521 is detected by the upper initial position sensor 516a, the first and second upper support portions 521 and 531 are decelerated. It is controlled to hold the excitation and stop at the upper initial position (corresponding to the 18th to 22nd processing tables TD18 to TD22).

First to second processing tables TD1 to TD2, fourth to fifth processing tables TD4 to TD5, seventh to ninth processing tables TD7 to TD9, and eleventh to thirteenth processing in the reciprocating operation table. In the tables TD11 to TD13, the 15th to 16th processing tables TD15 to TD16, and the 18th to 20th processing tables TD18 to TD20, the upper support is performed once for each X interrupt according to the "frequency" of each table. When the drive data of the unit drive motor 505 is updated and the drive data is updated as many times as the "number of steps" of each table, the process of moving to the next processing table is performed. In the third processing table TD3 in the reciprocating operation table, the drive data of the upper support drive motor 505 is updated once every X (3 times) interrupt according to the "frequency (333 [pps])". Then, when the upper initial position sensor 516a is switched from the detected state to the non-detected state, the process of shifting to the next processing table is performed. Since the upper initial position sensor 516a is in the detection state at the start of the reciprocating operation, the processing table (TD3) that controls with an indefinite number of steps is terminated at the timing when the upper initial position sensor 516a switches to the non-detection state, and the constant value is set. By shifting to the processing table (TD4) that controls by the number of steps, it is possible to stabilize the amount of operation up to the effect operation position. In the 17th processing table TD17 in the reciprocating operation table, the drive data of the upper support drive motor 505 is updated once every X (4 times) interrupt according to the "frequency (250 [pps])". Then, when the upper initial position sensor 516a switches from the non-detection state to the detection state, the process of shifting to the next processing table is performed. As described above, the reciprocating operation table includes a processing table in which the processing is completed when the operation pulses are transmitted to the upper support portion drive motor 505 by a predetermined number of steps, and the first and second upper support portions 521 and 531. It includes a processing table in which processing ends when the upper initial position sensor 516a moves to the detection position (or non-detection position).

In the 7th to 14th processing tables TD7 to TD14 of the reciprocating operation table, the upper support portion drive motor 505 is determined by accelerating the first and second upper support portions 521 and 531 toward the upper initial position. The operation of decelerating and holding the first and second upper support portions 521 and 531 in a high speed state and accelerating the first and second upper support portions 521 and 531 toward the upper movable position to bring them into a constant speed state. The operation of decelerating and holding the excitation by decelerating the first and second upper support portions 521 and 531 is repeated a set number of times with the following changes (7th to 14th processing tables TD7 to TD7 to 14). The TD 14 may be controlled to loop a set number of times). Here, the eighth processing table TD8 is used as a processing table that controls with an indefinite number of steps, and when the upper initial position sensor 516a switches from the non-detection state to the detection state, the process of shifting to the next processing table (TD9) is performed. Change to do. As a result, the first and second upper support portions 521 and 531 surely return to the upper initial positions in the reciprocating operation. Therefore, even in the reciprocating operation, the first and second upper support portions 521 and 531 are affected by the action of gravity. It is possible to prevent the 531 from being lowered too much, causing a sense of discomfort such as the center position of the reciprocating operation of the first and second upper support portions 521 and 531 being displaced. Further, the reciprocating operation is not limited to the control of ending the reciprocating operation when the reciprocating operation is repeated a set number of times. By turning off the reciprocating operation repeating flag when the effect button 10 is operated, the reciprocating operation is performed by the operation of the effect button 10. You may want to control to end.

Next, the second accessory control process is executed (S733). In this second accessory control process (S733), when the operation of the second upper effect member 581 of the upper effect device 500 is requested, the process of updating the drive data of the upper effect unit drive motor 538 is performed. The drive pattern data of the upper effect unit drive motor 538 is configured to be able to execute an operation according to two types of operation tables shown in FIGS. 111A to 111B, for example. The two types of operation tables shown in FIGS. 111A to 111B are selected according to the content of the operation request for the second upper effect member 581. In the operation table shown in FIGS. 111 (A) to 111 (B), (+) of the "operation" item indicates that the rotation direction of the drive motor is the normal rotation direction, and (-) of the "operation" item is. Indicates that the rotation direction of the drive motor is the reverse direction.

The operation table shown in FIG. 111A may be referred to as an operation table for moving the second upper effect member 581 of the upper effect device 500 from the initial proximity position to the separable movable position (hereinafter, for convenience, the operation table for the separate movable position). ), And is composed of the first to seventh processing tables TE1 to TE7. According to the first to seventh processing tables TE1 to TE7, the upper effect unit drive motor 538 accelerates the second upper effect member 581 from the initial proximity position to the separable movable position to be in a constant speed state (first to third). When the sensor detection unit 589 of the second upper effect member 581 is detected by the separate movable position sensor 558c in the processing tables TE1 to TE3), the second upper effect member 581 is decelerated to be excited and held, and the separate movable position is held. It is controlled to stop at (corresponding to the fourth to seventh processing tables TE4 to TE7).

In the operation table for the separated movable position, in the first to second processing tables TE1 to TE2 and the fourth to fifth processing tables TE4 to TE5, once for each X interrupt according to the "frequency" of each table. When the drive data of the upper effect unit drive motor 538 is updated and the drive data is updated as many times as the "number of steps" of each table, the process of moving to the next processing table is performed. In the third processing table TE3 in the operation table for the separable movable position, the drive data of the upper effect unit drive motor 538 is input once for X times (twice) interrupts according to the "frequency (500 [pps])". When the separated movable position sensor 558c is updated and the separated movable position sensor 558c is switched from the non-detected state to the detected state, the process of shifting to the next processing table is performed. As described above, the operation table for the separable movable position is a processing table in which the processing is completed when the operation pulse is transmitted to the upper effect unit drive motor 538 by a predetermined number of steps, and the second upper effect member 581 is a separate movable position sensor. It includes a processing table that ends processing when it moves to the detection position of 558c.

The operation table shown in FIG. 111B is the second upper effect member 581 of the upper effect device 500.
Is an operation table for returning to the proximity initial position (hereinafter, may be referred to as an operation table for the proximity initial position for convenience), and is composed of first to eighth processing tables TF1 to TF8. According to the first to eighth processing tables TF1 to TF8, the upper effect unit drive motor 538 accelerates the second upper effect member 581 from the separated movable position to the near initial position to a constant speed state (first to third). Processing tables TF1 to TF3), and when the sensor detection unit 589 of the second upper effect member 581 is detected by the proximity initial position sensor 558a, the second upper effect member 581 is decelerated and excited to be held, and the proximity initial position It is controlled to stop at (corresponding to the fourth to eighth processing tables TF4 to TF8).

In the first and second processing tables TF1 to TF2 and the fourth to sixth processing tables TF4 to TF6 in the operation table for the proximity initial position, once for each X interrupt according to the "frequency" of each table. When the drive data of the upper effect unit drive motor 538 is updated and the drive data is updated as many times as the "number of steps" of each table, the process of moving to the next processing table is performed. In the third processing table TF3 in the operation table for the near initial position, the drive data of the upper effect unit drive motor 538 is input once for X (3 times) interrupts according to the "frequency (333 [pps])". When the proximity initial position sensor 558a is updated and the proximity initial position sensor 558a is switched from the non-detection state to the detection state, the process of shifting to the next processing table is performed. As described above, the operation table for the proximity initial position includes the processing table in which the processing is completed when the operation pulse is transmitted to the upper effect unit drive motor 538 by a predetermined number of steps, and the second upper effect member 581 is the proximity initial position sensor. It includes a processing table that ends processing when it moves to the detection position of 558a.

In the second accessory control process (S733), even when the operation of the second upper effect member 581 is requested, the first and second upper support portions 521 and 531 of the upper effect device 500 move to the upper movable position. If not, skip the process. Then, when the first and second upper support portions 521 and 531 move to the upper movable position, the process of updating the drive data of the upper effect unit drive motor 538 is started. For example, in the operation tables shown in FIGS. 111A to 111B, when the upper movable position sensor 516c switches from the non-detection state to the detection state, the processing of the first processing table TE1 in the operation table for the separate movable position is started. To do.

As described above, in the operation table for the upper movable position shown in FIG. 110 (A), in the upper support portion drive motor 505 of the upper effect device 500, the sensor detection unit 524 of the first upper support portion 521 has the upper movable position sensor 516c. When detected by, the first and second upper support portions 521 and 531 are controlled to decelerate, hold the excitation, and stop at the upper movable position. In this way, even after the upper movable position sensor 516c is switched from the non-detection state to the detection state and the upper effect unit drive motor 538 starts operating, the upper support unit drive motor 505 is in a state of operating for a certain period of time. In the present embodiment, in the operation table for the separable movable position shown in FIG. 111 (A), the "frequency" of the first and second processing tables TE1 to TE2 is set to a relatively small value. As a result, the rotation speed of the upper effect unit drive motor 538 immediately after the start of operation is lowered and the current consumption is suppressed. Therefore, in the electrical limitation determination process (S745) described later, the upper support unit drive motor 505 and the upper effect unit drive are driven. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the total current consumption of the drive motor including the motor 538 exceeds a predetermined regulated current value. In this way, even when the upper effect unit drive motor 538 starts operating when the upper movable position sensor 516c switches from the non-detection state to the detection state, the upper effect unit drive motor 538 operates smoothly. It is possible to make it.

Next, the third accessory control process is executed (S734). In the third accessory control process (S734), when the operation of the sub-display device 561 of the upper effect device 500 is requested, the drive data of the display device drive motor 534 is updated. The drive pattern data of the display device drive motor 534 is configured to be able to execute the same operations as the operation tables shown in FIGS. 110 (A) to 110 (D), and is the same as in the case of the first accessory control process (S732). Can be processed. In the third accessory control process (S734), even when the operation of the sub-display device 561 is requested, the process is skipped if the second upper effect member 581 of the upper effect device 500 has not moved to the separable movable position. To do. Then, when the second upper effect member 581 moves to the separate movable position, the process of updating the drive data of the display device drive motor 534 is started. When the sub-display device 561 is rotated by the display device drive motor 534 in a state where the second upper effect member 581 is not moved to the separable movable position, the second upper side is on the rotation locus of the edge of the sub-display device 561. This is because the effect member 581 is located and interferes. The operation requests for the first and second upper support portions 521, 531 of the upper effect device 500, the second upper effect member 581, and the display device drive motor 534 are collectively transmitted according to the variation effect pattern, and the first to third In the accessory control process (S732 to S734), each drive motor is driven based on the detection information and error information of the position detection sensor (of another effect member different from the effect member to be controlled) of the upper effect device 500. Timing is controlled.

Next, the fourth accessory control process is executed (S735). In the fourth accessory control process (S735), when the operation of the upper left front side effect member 761 of the upper left side effect device 700 is requested, the drive data of the upper left front side drive motor 737 is updated. The drive pattern data of the upper left front side drive motor 737 is configured to be able to execute the same operations as the operation tables shown in FIGS. 111 (A) to 111 (B), and is the same as in the case of the second accessory control process (S733). Can be processed. In the fourth accessory control process (S735), even when requesting an operation toward the downward movable position of the upper left front side effect member 761, the lower left front side effect member 661 of the lower left side effect device 600 moves to the left tilt movable position. If not, the process is skipped in order to prevent the upper left front side effect member 761 from interfering with the lower left front side effect member 661. Then, when the lower left front side effect member 661 moves to the left tilting movable position, the process of updating the drive data of the upper left front side drive motor 737 is started. As a result, it is possible to prevent the upper left front side effect member 761 from coming into contact with the lower left front side effect member 661.

Next, the fifth accessory control process is executed (S736). In the fifth accessory control process (S736), when the operation of the upper left back side effect member 721 of the upper left side effect device 700 is requested, the drive data of the upper left back side drive motor 703 is updated. The drive pattern data of the upper left back side drive motor 703 is configured to be able to execute the same operations as the operation tables shown in FIGS. 111 (A) to 111 (B), and is the same as in the case of the second accessory control process (S733). Can be processed. Since the upper left back side effect member 721 does not interfere with other effect members when moving toward the upper left back side movable position or the upper left back side initial position, in order to avoid interference based on the position information of the other effect members. Processing is not skipped. However, processing is skipped as appropriate to improve the appearance of the effect operation.

Next, the sixth accessory control process is executed (S737). In the sixth accessory control process (S737), when the operation of the lower left front side effect member 661 of the lower left side effect device 600 is requested, the drive data of the lower left front side drive motor 637 is updated. The drive pattern data of the lower left front side drive motor 637 is configured to be able to execute the same operations as the operation tables shown in FIGS. 111 (A) to 111 (B), and is the same as in the case of the second accessory control process (S733). Can be processed. In the sixth accessory control process (S737), even when requesting the operation of the lower left front side effect member 661 toward the left standing initial position, the upper left front side effect member 761 of the upper left side effect device 700 is set to the upper initial position. When not moving, the process is skipped in order to prevent the lower left front side effect member 661 from interfering with the upper left front side effect member 761. Then, when the upper left front side effect member 761 moves to the upper initial position, the process of updating the drive data of the lower left front side drive motor 637 is started. As a result, it is possible to prevent the lower left front side effect member 661 from coming into contact with the upper left front side effect member 761.

Next, the seventh accessory control process is executed (S738). This seventh accessory control process (S738)
), When requesting the operation of the lower left back side effect member 621 of the lower left side effect device 600, a process of updating the drive data of the lower left back side drive motor 603 is performed. The drive pattern data of the lower left back side drive motor 603 is configured to be able to execute the same operations as the operation tables shown in FIGS. 111 (A) to 111 (B), and is the same as in the case of the second accessory control process (S733). Can be processed. Since the lower left back side effect member 621 does not interfere with other effect members when moving toward the lower left back side movable position or the lower left back side initial position, in order to avoid interference based on the position information of the other effect members. Processing is not skipped. However, processing is skipped as appropriate to improve the appearance of the effect operation.

Next, the eighth accessory control process is executed (S739). In the eighth accessory control process (S739), when the operation of the upper right back side effect member 851 of the right side effect device 800 is requested, the drive data of the upper right back side drive motor 808 is updated. The drive pattern data of the upper right back side drive motor 808 is configured to be able to execute the same operations as the operation tables shown in FIGS. 111 (A) to 111 (B), and is the same as in the case of the second accessory control process (S733). Can be processed. Since the upper right back side effect member 851 does not interfere with other effect members when moving toward the upper right back side movable position or the upper right back side initial position, in order to avoid interference based on the position information of the other effect members. Processing is not skipped. However, processing is skipped as appropriate to improve the appearance of the effect operation.

Next, the ninth accessory control process is executed (S740). In the ninth accessory control process (S740), when the operation of the lower right back side effect member 831 of the right side effect device 800 is requested, the drive data of the lower right back side drive motor 803 is updated. The drive pattern data of the lower right back side drive motor 803 is configured to be able to execute the same operations as the operation tables shown in FIGS. 111 (A) to 111 (B), as in the case of the second accessory control process (S733). Similar processing can be performed. Since the lower right back side effect member 831 does not interfere with other effect members when moving toward the lower right back side movable position or the lower right back side initial position, interference based on the position information of the other effect members. The process for avoidance is not skipped. However, processing is skipped as appropriate to improve the appearance of the effect operation.

Next, the tenth accessory control process is executed (S741). In the tenth accessory control process (S741), when the operation of the lower right front side effect member 891 of the right side effect device 800 is requested, the drive data of the lower right front side drive motor 867 is updated. The drive pattern data of the lower right front side drive motor 867 is configured to be able to execute the same operations as the operation tables shown in FIGS. 111 (A) to 111 (B), and is different from the case of the second accessory control process (S733). Similar processing can be performed. Since the lower right front side effect member 891 does not interfere with other effect members when moving toward the right tilting movable position or the right side standing initial position, interference avoidance based on the position information of the other effect members is avoided. The processing for is not skipped. However, processing is skipped as appropriate to improve the appearance of the effect operation.

Next, the eleventh accessory control process is executed (S742). In this eleventh accessory control process (S742), when the operations of the first and second front side movable support portions 951, 961 and the first and second back side movable support portions 921,931 of the lower effect device 900 are requested. In addition, a process of updating the drive data of the movable support unit drive motor 904 is performed. The drive pattern data of the movable support unit drive motor 904 is configured to be able to execute the same operations as the operation tables shown in FIGS. 111 (A) to 111 (B), as in the case of the second accessory control process (S733). Similar processing can be performed. The first and second front side movable support portions 951, 961 and the first and second back side movable support portions 921, 931 have other effects when they are operated toward the lower movable position or the lower initial position. Since it does not interfere with the member, the process for avoiding interference based on the position information of the other effect member is not skipped. However, processing is skipped as appropriate to improve the appearance of the effect operation.

Next, the twelfth accessory control process is executed (S743). In the twelfth accessory control process (S743), when the operation of the first and second front side effect members 971 and 981 of the lower side effect device 900 is requested, the drive data of the front side drive motor 967 is updated. .. The drive pattern data of the front side drive motor 967 is configured to be able to execute the same operations as the operation tables shown in FIGS. 111 (A) to 111 (B), and is the same as in the case of the second accessory control process (S733). Processing can be performed. It should be noted that the first and second front side effect members 971 and 981 do not interfere with other effect members when operating toward the first and second front side movable positions or the first and second front side initial positions. , The process for avoiding interference based on the position information of other effect members is not skipped. However, processing is skipped as appropriate to improve the appearance of the effect operation.

Next, the thirteenth accessory control process is executed (S744). In the thirteenth accessory control process (S744), when the operation of the first and second back side effect members 941 and 946 of the lower side effect device 900 is requested, the process of updating the drive data of the back side rotary drive motor 934 is performed. Do. The drive pattern data of the backside rotary drive motor 934 is configured to be able to execute the same operations as the operation tables shown in FIGS. 111 (A) to 111 (B), and is the same as in the case of the second accessory control process (S733). Can be processed. It should be noted that the first and second back side effect members 941 and 946 do not interfere with other effect members when operating toward the first and second back side movable positions or the first and second back side initial positions. , The process for avoiding interference based on the position information of other effect members is not skipped. However, processing is skipped as appropriate to improve the appearance of the effect operation.

Further, in the 11th to 13th accessory control processes (S742 to S744), it is possible to skip the process based on the position information of other effect members. For example, when the lower effect device 900 performs the effect operation as shown in FIGS. 58 and 60 to 62, in the eleventh accessory control process (S742), the first and second front side movable support portions 951, 961 and , Even when requesting an operation toward the lower movable position of the first and second back side movable support portions 921,931, if other effect members that may interfere with each other have not moved to the initial position, the effect It is possible to skip the process to avoid interfering with the member. In the twelfth accessory control process (S743), even when requesting the operation of the first and second front side effect members 971, 981 toward the first and second front side movable positions, the first and second front side movable support portions When 951, 961 and the first and second back side movable support portions 921, 931 have not moved to the lower movable position, it is possible to skip the process in order to improve the appearance of the effect operation. In the thirteenth accessory control process (S744), even when requesting the operation of the first and second back side effect members 941 and 946 toward the first and second back side movable positions, the first and second front side effect members 971 When, 981 has not moved to the first and second front side movable positions, the processing can be skipped in order to improve the appearance of the effect operation.

Further, for example, when the lower effect device 900 performs the initial position return operation opposite to the above-mentioned effect operation, in the twelfth accessory control process (S743), the first of the first and second front side effect members 971, 981 And even when requesting the operation toward the second front side initial position, if the first and second back side effect members 941 and 946 have not moved to the first and second back side initial positions, the appearance of the initial position return operation is improved. It is possible to skip the process for better. In the eleventh accessory control process (S742), when requesting an operation toward the lower initial positions of the first and second front side movable support portions 951, 961 and the first and second back side movable support portions 921, 931. However, when the first and second front side effect members 971 and 981 have not moved to the first and second front side initial positions, the process can be skipped in order to improve the appearance of the initial position return operation.

Next, the electrical restriction determination process is executed (S745). In this electrical limit determination process (S745), in the above-mentioned first to thirteenth accessory control processes (S732) to (S734), the current consumption of the drive motor for which the output of the operation pulse is set by the interrupt process this time. It is determined whether or not the total value exceeds a predetermined regulation current value. In the present embodiment, there is a drive pattern in which a plurality of effect members are simultaneously moved among the plurality of effect members of each effect device.

The table of FIG. 113 shows an example of a simultaneous drive pattern in which a plurality of drive motors of each effect device can simultaneously move the corresponding effect members. In the example shown in the table of FIG. 113, there are first to thirteenth simultaneous drive patterns. The circles in the table of FIG. 113 indicate the drive motors that operate in the first to thirteenth simultaneous drive patterns. For example, the first simultaneous drive pattern includes the upper left back side drive motor 703 of the upper left side effect device 700, the lower left back side drive motor 603 of the lower left side effect device 600, the upper right back side drive motor 808 of the right side effect device 800, and the lower right back side. The simultaneous drive pattern in which the drive motor 803 operates is shown, and the second simultaneous drive pattern includes the upper support unit drive motor 505 and the upper effect unit drive motor 538 of the upper effect unit 500, and the upper left back side drive motor of the upper left side effect device 700. The simultaneous drive pattern in which the 703 and the lower left back side drive motor 603 of the lower left side effect device 600 operate is shown. Further, for example, in the twelfth simultaneous drive pattern, the upper support unit drive motor 505 and the upper effect unit drive motor 538 of the upper effect device 500, the movable support unit drive motor 904 of the lower effect device 900, the front side drive motor 967, and The simultaneous drive pattern in which the back side rotary drive motor 934 operates is shown.

The table of FIG. 112 shows the relationship between the current consumption value of the drive motor and the regulated current value in each effect device. The power supply shown in the table of FIG. 112 indicates the power supply of each drive motor. The upper support unit drive motor 505, the upper effect unit drive motor 538, and the display device drive motor 534 of the upper effect unit 500 operate using the electric power supplied from the first 12V power supply G1 provided on the power supply board 450. To do. The upper left front drive motor 737 and the upper left back drive motor 703 of the left upper effect device 700 also operate using the electric power supplied from the first 12V power supply G1. The lower left front side drive motor 637 and the lower left back side drive motor 603 of the lower left side effect device 600 also operate using the electric power supplied from the first 12V power supply G1. The upper right back side drive motor 808, the lower right back side drive motor 803, and the lower right front side drive motor 867 of the right side effect device 800 also operate using the electric power supplied from the first 12V power supply G1. The movable support drive motor 904, the front drive motor 967, and the back rotary drive motor 934 of the lower effect device 900 operate using the electric power supplied from the second 12V power supply G2 provided on the power supply board 450. ..

The priority shown in the table of FIG. 112 indicates the priority when operating each drive motor. As shown in the table of FIG. 112, for example, the order of priority is the order of the drive motors corresponding to the above-mentioned first to thirteenth accessory control processes (S732) to (S734) (upper support portion drive motor 505, upper effect). Part drive motor 538, display device drive motor 534, upper left front side drive motor 737, upper left back side drive motor 703, lower left front side drive motor 637, lower left back side drive motor 603, upper right back side drive motor 808, lower right back side drive motor 803, lower right The front side drive motor 867, the movable support part drive motor 904, the front side drive motor 967, and the back side rotary drive motor 934) can be set in this order.

In the table of FIG. 112, the current consumption value of the upper support unit drive motor 505 of the upper effect device 500 is H1, the current consumption value of the upper effect unit drive motor 538 is H2, and the current consumption value of the display device drive motor 534 is H3. And. The current consumption value of the upper left front drive motor 737 of the left upper effect device 700 is H4, and the current consumption value of the upper left back drive motor 703 is H5. The current consumption value of the lower left front side drive motor 637 of the lower left side effect device 600 is H6, and the current consumption value of the lower left back side drive motor 603 is H7. The current consumption value of the upper right back side drive motor 808 of the right side effect device 800 is H8, the current consumption value of the lower right back side drive motor 803 is H9, and the current consumption value of the lower right front side drive motor 867 is H10. The current consumption value of the movable support drive motor 904 of the lower effect device 900 is H11, the current consumption value of the front drive motor 967 is H12, and the current consumption value of the back rotation drive motor 934 is H13. The current consumption values H1 to H13 of each drive motor are about 0.4 [A] to 1.8 [A].

The regulated current value is set for each power supply of each drive motor. In the example shown in the table of FIG. 112, a drive motor using the first 12V power supply G1 as a power source (upper support unit drive motor 505, upper effect unit drive motor 538, display device drive motor 534, upper left front side drive motor 737, upper left back side). The first regulated current value HL1 for the drive motor 703, the lower left front side drive motor 637, the lower left back side drive motor 603, the upper right back side drive motor 808, the lower right back side drive motor 803, and the lower right front side drive motor 867), and the second The second regulation current value HL2 is set for the drive motors (movable support unit drive motor 904, front side drive motor 967, and back side rotary drive motor 934) using the 12V power supply G2 as the power source. In the present embodiment, in addition to the first regulated current value HL1 and the second regulated current value HL2, the total regulated current value HLA for all the drive motors is set. The first regulated current value HL1 and the second regulated current value HL2 are set to, for example, 5.0 [A]. The total regulated current value HLA is set to, for example, 6.0 [A]. The first regulated current value HL1 and the second regulated current value HL2 may be set to different current values. Further, the total regulated current value HLA is larger than the first regulated current value HL1 and the second regulated current value HL2, and is smaller than the current value obtained by adding the first regulated current value HL1 and the second regulated current value HL2. It may be set.

In the examples shown in the tables of FIGS. 112 and 113, for example, as in the twelfth simultaneous drive pattern, the upper support unit drive motor 505 and the upper effect unit drive motor 538 of the upper effect device 500, and the lower effect device 900. The processing when the movable support portion drive motor 904, the front side drive motor 967, and the back side rotary drive motor 934 are driven at the same time will be described. In this case, it is determined whether or not the total current consumption of the upper support unit drive motor 505 and the upper effect unit drive motor 538, for which the output of the operation pulse is set by the interrupt processing this time, exceeds the first regulation current value HL1. To do. When the total value of the current consumption exceeds the first regulated current value HL1, the drive motor having the higher priority among the upper support unit drive motor 505 and the upper effect unit drive motor 538 within the range not exceeding the first regulated current value HL1. Set the output of the operation pulse of. Then, the output information of the operation pulse of the other low-priority drive motor is stored in the save buffer, and in the next interrupt process, the process is read from the save buffer and set with priority.

Also, does the total current consumption of the movable support drive motor 904, the front side drive motor 967, and the back side rotary drive motor 934, for which the output of the operation pulse is set by this interrupt processing, exceed the second regulation current value HL2? Judge whether or not. When the total value of the current consumption exceeds the second regulated current value HL2, priority is given to the movable support drive motor 904, the front side drive motor 967, and the back side rotary drive motor 934 within the range not exceeding the second regulated current value HL2. Set the output of the operation pulse of the drive motor with the highest rank. Then, the output information of the operation pulse of the other low-priority drive motor is stored in the save buffer, and in the next interrupt process, the process is read from the save buffer and set with priority.

Further, the current consumption of the upper support unit drive motor 505, the upper effect unit drive motor 538, the movable support unit drive motor 904, the front side drive motor 967, and the back side rotation drive motor 934 in which the output of the operation pulse is set by the interrupt processing this time. It is determined whether or not the total value of the above exceeds the total regulated current value HLA. When the total value of the current consumption exceeds the total regulated current value HLA, the upper support unit drive motor 505, the upper effect unit drive motor 538, the movable support unit drive motor 904, and the front side drive are within the range not exceeding the total regulated current value HLA. The output of the operation pulse of the drive motor having the higher priority among the motor 967 and the backside rotary drive motor 934 is set. Then, the output information of the operation pulse of the other low-priority drive motor is stored in the save buffer, and in the next interrupt process, the process is read from the save buffer and set with priority.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the total value of the current consumption of the drive motor from becoming too large and the operation of the drive motor becomes unstable, so that the operation of the effect device can be stabilized. In addition, among the first to thirteenth simultaneous drive patterns, also in the case of other simultaneous drive patterns, the first regulated current value HL1, the second regulated current value HL2, and the total regulated current value HLA are determined, and the same is true. It is possible to perform the processing of. Further, when the output information of the operation pulse of the drive motor having a low priority is stored in the save buffer, the operation of the effect device having a low priority can be operated by performing the process of setting priority in the next interrupt process. It is possible to prevent the operation of the effect device from becoming irregular to the extent that it is not executed by continuous interrupt processing and is perceived by the player.

Then, after the electrical restriction determination process (S745), the error determination process is executed (S746). In this error determination process (S746), a step number over error determination process, a position check error determination process, and a time monitoring check error determination process are performed. In the step number over error determination process, the position detection sensor does not detect that the effect member of each effect device is located at the initial position, the movable position, or the intermediate position, and the counter value (step) of the operation pulse of the drive motor is not detected. It is determined whether or not the number) exceeds the error determination value. When the counter value (number of steps) of the operation pulse of this drive motor exceeds the error determination value, it is determined that the error is over the number of steps. As described above, the counter value (number of steps) of the operation pulse of the drive motor corresponding to the initial position, the intermediate position, and the movable position is the initial value (for example, zero value) when the effect member is located at the initial position. As a result, the values are reset to different values when the drive motor rotates forward and reverse. As a result, the reference position when counting the counter value (number of steps) of the operation pulse of the drive motor is unified at the initial position, so that the error determination value of the step number over error can be accurately obtained. Therefore, it is possible to accurately determine the step number over error, and it is possible to stabilize the operation of the effect device. Each operation table shown in FIGS. 110 and 111 includes a processing table in which the number of steps is indefinite until the position detection sensor switches to the detection state. When the effect member stops operating due to (mechanical trouble), the counter value of the operation pulse of the drive motor is updated without switching from the processing table having an indefinite number of steps. Therefore, the counter value of the operation pulse of the drive motor can be used as the determination value of the abnormal operation, and it is not necessary to separately provide a counter for measuring the time for determining the timeout. If there is a possibility of using an operation table that does not include a processing table with an indefinite number of steps, the operation of the effect member will end even if an abnormal state occurs. It is preferable to provide a timer (timekeeping counter) for monitoring on / off.

In the case of the first setting example of the counter value of the operation pulse of the drive motor, as shown in FIG. 108, the error determination value of the step number over error can be set for the six error determination sections K1 to K6. The first error determination section K1 is a section from an intermediate position at the time of normal rotation of the drive motor until the sensor detection unit starts shading the light receiving unit of the movable position sensor. The second error determination section K2 is a section from the initial position at the time of normal rotation of the drive motor until the sensor detection unit starts shading the light receiving unit of the intermediate position sensor. The third error determination section K3 is a section from the initial position when the drive motor rotates in the normal direction to when the sensor detection unit starts shading the light receiving unit of the movable position sensor. The fourth error determination section K4 is a section from the intermediate position when the drive motor is reversed to when the sensor detection unit starts shading the light receiving unit of the initial position sensor. The fifth error determination section K5 is a section from the movable position when the drive motor is reversed to when the sensor detection unit starts shading the light receiving unit of the intermediate position sensor. The sixth error determination section K6 is a section from the movable position when the drive motor is reversed to when the sensor detection unit starts shading the light receiving unit of the initial position sensor.

The error determination values ES1 to ES6 corresponding to the first to sixth error determination sections K1 to K6 are represented by the following equations (1) to (6). The coefficients α in the following equations (1) to (6) are set to numerical values (for example, 1.2) according to the assembly error of each effect device.

ES1 = SP2 + SP3 + SP4 + (SP5 + SP6) x α ... (1)
ES2 = (SP2 + SP3) x α ... (2)
ES3 = (SP2 + SP3 + SP4 + SP5 + SP6) × α… (3)
ES4 = SP2 + SP3 + SP4- (SP3 + SP4) x α ... (4)
ES5 = SP2 + SP3 + SP4 + SP5 + SP6 + SP7
-(SP6 + SP7) x α ... (5)
ES6 = SP2 + SP3 + SP4 + SP5 + SP6 + SP7
-(SP3 + SP4 + SP5 + SP6 + SP7) x α ... (6)

In the case of the second setting example of the counter value of the operation pulse of the drive motor, as shown in FIG. 109, the error determination value of the step number over error can be set for the two error determination sections K11 to K12. The seventh error determination section K11 is a section from the initial position when the drive motor rotates in the normal direction to when the sensor detection unit starts shading the light receiving unit of the movable position sensor. The eighth error determination section K12 is a section from the movable position when the drive motor is reversed to when the sensor detection unit starts shading the light receiving unit of the initial position sensor.

The error determination values ES12 to ES12 corresponding to the seventh to eighth error determination sections K11 to K12 are represented by the following equations (7) to (8). The coefficients α1 in the following equations (7) to (8) are set to numerical values (for example, 1.2) according to the assembly error of each effect device.

ES11 = (SP12 + SP13) x α1 ... (7)
ES12 = SP12 + SP13 + SP14
-(SP13 + SP14) x α1 ... (8)

The coefficients α in the equations (1) to (6) and the coefficients α1 in the equations (7) to (8) may be appropriately set to different values depending on the configuration of the effect member moved by the drive motor. Further, the coefficients α in the equations (1) to (6) and the coefficients α1 in the equations (7) to (8) are, for example, when the effect member moves in the vertical direction, depending on the difference in the load of the drive motor due to gravity. It may be set to a different value depending on the rotation direction of the drive motor.

In the position check error determination process, it is determined whether or not the effect member of each effect device is located at the initial position at the timing of the turning point of the game. The timing of the turning point of the game is the timing of the customer waiting demonstration, the timing of winning a big hit in the winning / failing lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the timing of the start of fluctuation of the decorative symbol, and the timing of the end of the fluctuation of the decorative symbol. That is. If the effect member of each effect device is not located at the initial position at the timing of the turning point of the game, it is determined as a position check error. In the time monitoring check error determination process, when the effect member is located at the initial position in control (when no operation request is made), the state of the position detection sensor corresponding to the effect member is set to a predetermined monitoring time (for example,). It is determined whether or not the detection state is not detected for 5 seconds or more. If the state of this position detection sensor is a non-detection state for a predetermined monitoring time or longer, it is determined that a time monitoring check error has occurred.

[Error recovery processing, etc.]
If it is determined in the above-mentioned error determination process (S746) that the number of steps is exceeded, the position check error, or the time monitoring check error is determined, the error recovery process corresponding to each error is executed. In the present embodiment, the error recovery process and the process are standardized for the initialization operation process when the power supply is turned on for the effect device. Therefore, the initialization operation process at the time of power-up of the effect device and the error recovery process corresponding to each error will be described.

<< Initialization operation processing when power is turned on >>
First, the initialization operation process at the time of turning on the power supply for the effect device will be briefly described. FIG. 101 (A) is a flowchart showing an outline of the initialization operation process at the time of turning on the power supply. When the power of the pachinko gaming machine PM is turned on, the initial position return process is executed (S751). In this initial position return process, control is performed to return the effect members of each effect device (upper effect device 500, lower left effect device 600, upper left effect device 700, right effect device 800, and lower effect device 900) to the initial position. Do. Details of this initial position return processing (S751) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 102 to 104.

Then, after executing the initial position return process (S751), the accessory initialization process is executed (S752). In this accessory initialization process, control is performed to move the effect member of each effect device within the maximum movable range (range between the initial position and the movable position). The details of this accessory initialization process (S752) will be described later with reference to FIG. 105. If the initialization operation process at the time of turning on the power supply fails 10 times, it is determined that a motor error is detected, all the drive motors in each effect device are stopped, and a process of shifting to a state in which the operation pattern request is not accepted is performed. At the same time, an image display by the effect display device 95, a voice notification by the speaker 8, and an external notification to the effect that the effect device is abnormal are performed by lighting the effect lamp LP.

<< Error recovery processing when the number of steps is exceeded >>
Next, the error recovery process when the number of steps is exceeded will be briefly described. FIG. 101 (B) is a flowchart showing an outline of error recovery processing when an error occurs in which the number of steps is exceeded. In the above-mentioned error determination process (S746), if it is determined that the number of steps exceeds the error, the initial position return process is executed (S756). This initial position return process is the same process as the initial position return process (S751) executed in the initialization operation process when the power is turned on.

Then, after executing the initial position return process (S756), the accessory initialization process is executed (S757). This accessory initialization process controls the movement of the effect member of the effect device determined to have an error of exceeding the number of steps within the maximum movable range (the range between the initial position and the movable position), and is performed when the power is turned on. This is the same process as the accessory initialization process (S752) executed in the initialization operation process. If the error recovery process at the time of the step number over error fails a plurality of times (for example, three times) in succession, it is determined as a motor error, all the drive motors in each effect device are stopped, and an operation pattern request is made. Performs the process of shifting to the unacceptable state. However, before the request is not accepted, the drive motor is controlled so as to move the effect member (determined as a step number over error) toward the initial position regardless of the detection state of the position detection sensor. For example, the effect member is moved toward a position where the area overlapping the front of the screen 95a of the effect display device 95 becomes smaller, and the effect member is driven so as not to overlap the front of the screen 95a of the effect display device 95 and interfere with visibility. Make an operation request for a fixed step operation (not an operation using a position detection sensor) to the motor. As a result, it is possible to prevent the effect member from hindering the visibility of the effect display device 95 when an error of exceeding the number of steps occurs.

As an operation request for the fixed step operation for the drive motor, among the operations toward the initial position of the effect member, the operation toward the movable position of the effect member, or the operation toward the intermediate position of the effect member, the effect display device 95 It is also possible to make an operation request toward a position that does not hinder the visibility of the device. The operation request for such a fixed step operation is one of a plurality of effect members when an operation request is made for an effect member which is not completed even if the error recovery process is repeated, or when a plurality of effect members are in an abnormal situation. In order to complete the error recovery process for the effect member of the above, it is conceivable to make an operation request for the other effect member. In addition, since the step number over error may be an abnormality during the game, the abnormality notification to the outside should be more conservative than the abnormality notification performed at the time of the initialization operation processing at the time of turning on the power. , It is desirable to ensure the visibility of the variable effect.

<< Error recovery processing when position check error >>
Next, the error recovery process at the time of a position check error will be briefly described. FIG. 101 (C) is a flowchart showing an outline of error recovery processing at the time of a position check error. If a position check error is determined in the above-mentioned error determination process (S746), the initial position return process is executed (S761). This initial position return process is the same process as the initial position return process (S751) executed in the initialization operation process when the power is turned on. If the error recovery process at the time of the position check error fails 10 times, it is determined that the motor is an error, all the drive motors in each effect device are stopped, and the process shifts to a state in which the operation pattern request is not accepted. , Image display by the effect display device 95, voice notification by the speaker 8, and external notification to the effect that the effect device is abnormal by lighting the effect lamp LP.

<< Error recovery processing when time monitoring check error occurs >>
Next, the error recovery process when a time monitoring check error occurs will be briefly described. FIG. 101 (D) is a flowchart showing an outline of error recovery processing when a time monitoring check error occurs. If a time monitoring check error is determined in the above-mentioned error determination process (S746), the initial position return process is executed (S766). This initial position return process is the same process as the initial position return process (S751) executed in the initialization operation process when the power is turned on. If the error recovery process at the time of the time monitoring check error fails 10 times, it is determined that the motor is an error, all the drive motors in each effect device are stopped, and the process shifts to a state in which the operation pattern request is not accepted. At the same time, an image display by the effect display device 95, a voice notification by the speaker 8, and an external notification to the effect that the effect device is abnormal are performed by lighting the effect lamp LP.

(Initial position return processing)
Next, the initial position return process (S751) will be described. 102 to 104 are flowcharts showing the details of the initial position return processing (S751).

First, all accessory stop processing is executed (S771). In this all accessory stop process (S771), control for temporarily stopping all the effect members in each effect device, that is, a stop request is made to the drive motor related to the operation of all the accessory.

Next, the upper left front side effect member return process is executed (S772). In this upper left front side effect member return process (S772), control is performed to return the upper left front side effect member 761 of the upper left side effect device 700 to the upper initial position. If the upper left front side effect member 761 is already located at the upper initial position, this process is skipped.

Next, the lower left front side effect member return process is executed (S773). In this lower left front side effect member return process (S773), control is performed to return the lower left front side effect member 661 of the lower left side effect device 600 to the left side standing initial position. If the lower left front side effect member 661 is already located at the initial position of the left side standing, this process is skipped.

Next, the front / back side effect member return process is executed (S774). In this front / back side effect member return process (S774), control is performed to return the first and second front side effect members 971 and 981 of the lower effect device 900 to the first and second front side initial positions. If the first and second front side effect members 971 and 981 are already located at the first and second front side initial positions, this process is skipped. In addition, control is performed to return the first and second back side effect members 941 and 946 of the lower effect device 900 to the first and second back side initial positions. If the first and second back side effect members 941 and 946 are already located at the first and second back side initial positions, this process is skipped.

Next, the movable support portion feedback process is executed (S775). In this movable support portion return process (S775), control is performed to return the first and second back side movable support portions 921, 931 and the like of the lower effect device 900 to the lower initial position. If the first and second backside movable support portions 921, 931 and the like are already located at the lower initial positions, this process is skipped.

Next, it is determined whether or not the lower right front side effect member 891 of the right side effect device 800 is located at the initial position of the right side standing (S776). In this first determination process (S776), when the lower right front side effect member 891 is not located at the right initial standing position (S776: NO), the first and second upper support portions 521, 531 of the upper effect device 500 Is located at the upper initial position, the second upper effect member 581 is located at the proximity initial position, and the sub-display device 561 is located at the rotation initial position (S777). In this second determination process (S777), the first and second upper support portions 521 and 531 are located at the upper initial positions, the second upper effect member 581 is located at the proximity initial position, and the sub-display device 561 When it is located at the initial rotation position (S777: YES), the process proceeds to the lower right front side effect member return process (S781).

On the other hand, when at least one of the first and second upper support portions 521, 531, the second upper effect member 581, and the sub display device 561 is not located at the initial position (S777: NO), the sub display device The process shifts to the operation process (S778). In this sub-display device operation process (S778), control is performed to rotate the sub-display device 561 toward the initial rotation position by a fixed step operation.

Next, the second upper effect member return process is executed (S779). In this second upper effect member return process (S779), control is performed to return the second upper effect member 581 of the upper effect device 500 to the near initial position. If the second upper effect member 581 is already located at the initial proximity position, this process is skipped.

Next, the upper support portion return process is executed (S780), and the process proceeds to the lower right front side effect member return process (S781). In this upper support portion return process (S780), control is performed to return the first and second upper support portions 521 and 531 of the upper effect device 500 to the upper initial positions. If the first and second upper support portions 521 and 531 are already located at the upper initial positions, this process is skipped.

In the lower right front side effect member return process (S781), control is performed to return the lower right front side effect member 891 of the right side effect device 800 to the right side standing initial position. If the lower right front side effect member 891 is already located at the right initial standing position, this process is skipped.

Next, it is determined whether or not the first and second upper support portions 521 and 531 of the upper effect device 500 are located at the upper initial positions and the sub-display device 561 is located at the rotation initial position (S782). In the first determination process (S776) above, when the lower right front side effect member 891 is located at the initial position of the right side standing (S776: YES), the second determination process (S777) described above, the sub-display device. This third determination process (S782) is skipped from the operation process (S778), the second upper effect member return process (S779), the upper support portion return process (S780), and the lower right front side effect member return process (S781). Move to. In the third determination process (S782), when the first and second upper support portions 521 and 531 are located at the upper initial positions and the sub-display device 561 is located at the rotation initial position (S782: YES), The process proceeds to the (second) second upper effect member return process (S789).

On the other hand, when at least one of the first and second upper support portions 521 and 531 and the sub-display device 561 is not located at the initial position (S782: NO), the second upper effect member movable process (S783) is performed. Transition. In this second upper effect member movable process (S783), control is performed to move the second upper effect member 581 of the upper effect device 500 to the separate movable position. If the second upper effect member 581 is already in the separate movable position, this process is skipped.

Next, the second upper effect member holding process is executed (S784). In this second upper effect member holding process (S784), when the second upper effect member 581 of the upper effect device 500 is located at the separable movable position, the second upper effect member 581 (by the upper effect unit drive motor 538). Controls the excitation holding operation.

Next, the upper support portion operation process is executed (S785). In this upper support portion operation process (S785), when the first and second upper support portions 521 and 531 of the upper effect device 500 are located at the upper movable positions, the first and second upper support portions 521 and 531 ( Controls the pushing operation (in the direction beyond the upper movable position). If the first and second upper support portions 521 and 531 are not located in the upper movable position, this process is skipped.

Next, the upper support portion movable process is executed (S786). In this upper support portion movable process (S786), control is performed to move the first and second upper support portions 521 and 531 of the upper effect device 500 to the upper movable position. If the first and second upper support portions 521 and 531 are already located in the upper movable position, this process is skipped.

Next, the sub-display device movable process is executed (S787). In this sub-display device movable process (S787), control is performed to rotate and move the sub-display device 561 of the upper effect device 500 to the rotatable movable position. If the sub-display device 561 is already in the rotatable position, this process is skipped.

Next, the sub-display device return process is executed (S788), and the process proceeds to the (second) second upper effect member return process (S789). In this sub-display device return process (S788), control is performed to return the sub-display device 561 of the upper effect device 500 to the initial rotation position. If the sub-display device 561 is already in the initial rotation position, this process is skipped.

In the (second) second upper effect member return process (S789), control is performed to return the second upper effect member 581 of the upper effect device 500 to the near initial position. If the second upper effect member 581 is already located at the initial proximity position, this process is skipped.

Next, the (second) second upper effect member holding process is executed (S790). In this (second) second upper effect member holding process (S790), when the second upper effect member 581 of the upper effect device 500 is located at the separable movable position, the (upper effect unit) of the second upper effect member 581. Control is performed to perform the excitation holding operation (by the drive motor 538).

Next, the (second) upper support portion feedback process is executed (S791). In this (second) upper support portion return process (S791), control is performed to return the first and second upper support portions 521 and 531 of the upper effect device 500 to the upper initial positions. If the first and second upper support portions 521 and 531 are already located at the upper initial positions, this process is skipped.

Then, the back side effect member return process is executed (S792). In this back side effect member return process (S792), control is performed to return the upper left back side effect member 721 of the upper left side effect device 700 to the upper left back side initial position. If the upper left back side effect member 721 is already located at the upper left back side initial position, this process is skipped. In addition, control is performed to return the lower left back side effect member 621 of the lower left side effect device 600 to the initial position on the lower left back side. If the lower left back side effect member 621 is already located at the initial position on the lower left back side, this process is skipped. In addition, control is performed to return the upper right back side movable member 841 of the right side effect device 800 to the upper right back side initial position. If the upper right back side movable member 841 is already located at the upper right back side initial position, this process is skipped. In addition, control is performed to return the lower right back side effect member 831 of the right side effect device 800 to the initial position on the lower right back side. If the lower right back side effect member 831 is already located at the initial position on the lower right back side, this process is skipped.

(Character initialization process)
Next, the accessory initialization process (S752) will be described. FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing the details of the accessory initialization process (S752).

First, the back side effect member initialization operation process is executed (S801). In this back side effect member initialization operation process (S801), control is performed to move the upper left back side effect member 721 of the upper left side effect device 700 within the maximum movable range (the range between the upper left back side initial position and the upper left back side movable position). Further, the control is performed to move the lower left back side effect member 621 of the lower left side effect device 600 within the maximum movable range (the range between the initial position on the lower left back side and the movable position on the lower left back side). Further, control is performed to move the upper right back side movable member 841 of the right side effect device 800 within the maximum movable range (the range between the upper right back side initial position and the upper right back side movable position). Further, the right lower back side effect member 831 of the right side effect device 800 is controlled to be moved within the maximum movable range (the range between the lower right back side initial position and the lower right back side movable position).

Next, the lower right front side effect member initialization operation process is executed (S802). In this lower right front side effect member initialization operation process (S802), control is performed to move the lower right front side effect member 891 of the right side effect device 800 within the maximum movable range (range between the right side standing initial position and the right side tilting movable position). I do.

Next, the upper left front side effect member initialization operation process is executed (S803). In this upper left front side effect member initialization operation process (S803), there is a possibility that the upper left front side effect member 761 of the upper left side effect device 700 interferes with the lower left front side effect member 661 of the lower left side effect device 600 during the confirmation operation. Therefore, first, the lower left front side effect member 661 is oscillated and displaced to the left side tilting movable position, and then the upper left front side effect member 761 is moved within the maximum movable range (the range between the upper initial position and the lower movable position). I do.

Next, the lower left front side effect member return process is executed (S804). In this lower left front side effect member return process (S804), control is performed to return the lower left front side effect member 661 of the lower left side effect device 600 from the left tilting movable position to the left side standing initial position. Since the lower left front side effect member 661 is oscillated and displaced to the left side tilting movable position in the upper left front side effect member initialization operation process (S803), the maximum movable range (the left side standing initial position and the left side tilting movable position) Of the operations in the range), only the operation to return to the initial position of standing on the left side is performed. By executing the upper left front side effect member initialization operation process (S803) and the lower left front side effect member return process (S804), the process replaces the initialization operation process of the lower left front side effect member 661.

Next, the upper effect member movable process is executed (S805). In this upper effect member movable process (S805), control is performed to move the first and second upper support portions 521 and 531 of the upper effect device 500 to the upper movable position. In addition, control is performed to move the second upper effect member 581 of the upper effect device 500 to the separable movable position.

Next, the sub-display device initialization operation process is executed (S806). In this sub-display device initialization operation process (S806), control is performed to perform the excitation holding operation of the second upper effect member 581 of the upper effect device 500. Further, the sub-display device 561 of the upper effect device 500 is rotated between the initial rotation position and the movable rotation position, and is controlled to return to the initial rotation position.

Next, the upper effect member return process is executed (S807). In this upper effect member return process (S807), control is performed to return the second upper effect member 581 of the upper effect device 500 from the separated movable position to the near initial position. Further, control is performed to return the first and second upper support portions 521 and 531 of the upper effect device 500 from the upper movable position to the upper initial position.

Next, the movable support portion movable process is executed (S808). In this movable support portion movable process (S808), control is performed to move the first and second back side movable support portions 921, 931 and the like of the lower effect device 900 to the lower movable position.

Next, the front / back side effect member initialization operation process is executed (S809). In this front / back side effect member initialization operation process (S809), the excitation holding operation (by the movable support part drive motor 904) of the first and second back side movable support parts 921,931 and the like moved to the lower movable position is performed. Control to make. Further, control for moving the first and second front side effect members 971 and 981 of the lower effect device 900 within the maximum movable range (the range between the first and second front side initial positions and the first and second front side movable positions). I do. Further, control for moving the first and second back side effect members 941 and 946 of the lower effect device 900 within the maximum movable range (the range between the first and second back side initial positions and the first and second back side movable positions). I do.

Then, the movable support portion feedback process is executed (S810). In this movable support portion return process (S810), control is performed to return the first and second back side movable support portions 921,931 and the like of the lower effect device 900 from the lower movable position to the lower initial position. Since the first and second back side movable support portions 921,931 and the like have moved to the lower movable position in the previous movable support portion movable process (S808), the maximum movable range (lower initial position and lower movable position) Of the operations in the range between and), only the operation of returning to the lower initial position is performed. By executing the movable support portion movable process (S808) and the movable support portion return process (S810), the process replaces the initialization operation process of the first and second back side movable support portions 921,931 and the like.

[Characteristic configuration in this embodiment]
[Characteristic configuration of upper effect device]
In the present embodiment, when the second upper effect member 581 is moved to the near initial position by the upper effect unit drive motor 538 or the like of the upper effect device 500, the first upper effect member 571 and the second upper effect member 571 are viewed from the front. When the front of the screen 561a of the sub-display device 561 is covered by the 581 and the second upper effect member 581 is moved to the separable movable position by the upper effect unit drive motor 538 or the like, the first upper effect member 571 and the second The screen 561a of the sub-display device 561 can be visually recognized from the front through the gap with the upper effect member 581. As a result, the sub-display device 561 appears from behind the first upper effect member 571 and the second upper effect member 581, and a predetermined effect image is displayed on the screen 561a of the sub-display device 561. It becomes possible to perform various effects.

Further, the sub-display device 561 is rotated along the plane including the screen 561a in a state where the second upper effect member 581 is moved to the separable movable position by the upper effect unit drive motor 538 or the like on the second upper support portion 531. A display device drive motor 534 and the like are provided. As a result, the sub-display device 561 appears from behind the first upper effect member 571 and the second upper effect member 581, and the sub-display device 561 is rotated by the display device drive motor 534 or the like, which is surprising. It is possible to perform various productions.

Further, the upper initial position where the second upper effect member 581 is moved to the proximity initial position by the upper effect unit drive motor 538 or the like, and the proximity initial position and the separate movable position of the second upper effect member 581 by the upper effect unit drive motor 538 or the like An upper base portion 501 that movably supports the first and second upper support portions 521 and 531 is provided between the upper production position and the second upper support portion 521 and 531. Then, as the first and second upper support portions 521 and 531 move relative to the upper base portion 501, the first upper effect member 571 can be displaced in the direction away from the second upper effect member 581. .. As a result, the first upper effect member 571 and the second upper effect member 581 supported by the first and second upper support portions 521 and 531 are integrated in a state of being close to each other from the upper initial position to the upper intermediate position. It can be moved as a target, or separated from each other between the upper intermediate position and the upper effect position, and various effects can be performed.

[Characteristic configuration of lower left effect device and upper left effect device]
In the present embodiment, the lower left side effect device 600 has a left side standing initial position in which the lower left front side effect member 661 extends in the vertical direction and a left side tilting movable position in which the lower left front side effect member 661 tilts to the left from the left side standing initial position. The lower left front side drive motor 637 and the like for displace the lower left front side effect member 661 are provided in the upper left side effect member 700, and the upper left front side effect member 761 is located in the upper left vicinity of the lower left front side effect member 661 at the initial position of the left side standing. The upper left front side drive motor 737 and the like for moving the upper left front side effect member 761 are provided at the upper initial position extending in the vertical direction and the lower movable position below the upper initial position. Then, the upper left front side drive motor 737 and the like move the upper left front side effect member 761 to the upper initial position and the lower movable position in a state where the lower left front side effect member 661 is displaced to the left side tilting movable position by the lower left front side drive motor 637 and the like. When the upper left front side effect member 761 is moved to the downward movable position by the upper left front side drive motor 737 or the like, it is configured to be located near the upper side of the lower left front side effect member 661 displaced to the left tilting movable position.

As a result, when the upper left front side effect member 761 moves from the upper initial position to the lower movable position, it is located near the upper side of the lower left front side effect member 661 displaced from the left side standing initial position to the left side tilting movable position. Therefore, if an integral effect member extending in the vertical direction is formed by the upper left front side effect member 761 at the upper initial position and the lower left front side effect member 661 at the left side standing initial position, the upper left front side effect member 761 It is possible to perform an effect in which an integrated effect member including the lower left front side effect member 661 collapses, and it is possible to perform a variety of unexpected effects. Further, the upper left front side drive motor 737 and the like move the upper left front side effect member 761 to the upper initial position and the lower movable position in a state where the lower left front side effect member 661 is displaced to the left tilt movable position by the lower left front side drive motor 637 and the like. It is possible. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the upper left front side effect member 761 from coming into contact with the lower left front side effect member 661, and it is possible to prevent the lower left side effect device 600 and the upper left side effect device 700 from failing.

Further, the upper left front side drive motor 737 and the like are configured to move the upper left front side effect member 761 extending in the vertical direction from the upper initial position to the lower movable position while tilting to the left. By complicating the movement of the upper left front side effect member 761 in this way, it is possible to perform various effects.

[Characteristic configuration of lower production device]
In the present embodiment, the left arm member 911 and the right arm member 916 of the lower effect device 900 engage with the left engagement pin 926 and the right engagement pin 927 provided on the left and right sides of the first back side movable support portion 921. It has a long hole-shaped left engagement hole 912 and a right engagement hole 917, and the first back side movable support portion 921 and the like move in the vertical direction with respect to the lower base portion 901 by the movable support portion drive motor 904 and the like. A left urging spring that is configured to swing in the vertical direction in accordance with the above, and applies urging force in the direction in which the left arm member 911 and the right arm member 916 swing upward on the left and right sides of the lower base portion 901. A 913 and a right urging spring 918 are provided. By doing so, the left arm member 911 and the right arm member 91 connected to the left and right of the first back side movable support portion 921
6. Even if the first back side effect member 941 and the second back side effect member 946 rotate and move, the displacement of the first back side movable support portion 921 and the like due to vibration or the like in the left-right direction is suppressed. Therefore, the rack gear portion 924 of the first back side movable support portion 921 is prevented from being displaced in the left-right direction and disengaged from the pinion gear 906 of the movable support portion drive mechanism 905 of the lower base portion 901. In this way, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent a failure of the lower effect device 900.

Further, when the first back side movable support portion 921 or the like moves to the lower movable position, the left engagement pin 926 of the first back side movable support portion 921 is moved to the tip end side of the left engagement hole 912 in the left arm member 911. The right engaging pin 927 comes into contact with the end of the right arm member 916 on the tip end side of the right engaging hole 917. Then, since the left engaging pin 926 and the right engaging pin 927 become more difficult to move, the first back side effect member 941 and the second back side effect are produced with the first back side movable support portion 921 and the like moved to the lower movable position. Even if the member 946 rotates and moves, the displacement of the first back side movable support portion 921 and the like in the left-right direction is effectively suppressed. Further, it is prevented that the first back side movable support portion 921 and the like move upward beyond the lower movable position and come off from the lower base portion 901. Therefore, it is possible to more reliably prevent the failure of the lower effect device 900.

[Characteristic configuration of electrical restriction judgment processing]
In the present embodiment, in an effect mode in which two or more drive motors out of a plurality of drive motors (drive sources) of each effect device cause the corresponding effect device to perform an effect operation, the consumption of the two or more drive motors. When the total value of the current exceeds a predetermined regulated current value, the operation timings of the two or more drive motors are controlled so that the total value of the current consumption is equal to or less than the regulated current value. As a result, it is possible to prevent the total value of the current consumption of the drive motor from becoming too large and the operation of the drive motor becomes unstable, so that the operation of the effect device can be stabilized.

[Characteristic configuration of error judgment processing]
In the present embodiment, when the effect member is moved to the detection position (initial position, intermediate position, and detection position in the movable position) of the position detection sensor by the drive motor (stepping motor), the effect member is located at the initial position. Is set as the initial value, and the counter value (number of steps) of the operation pulse of the drive motor corresponding to the detection position is set as the position information of the effect member (stored in the position information storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260). It is composed of. As a result, the reference position when counting the counter value (number of steps) of the operation pulse of the drive motor is unified at the initial position, so that the error determination value of the step number over error can be accurately obtained. Therefore, it is possible to accurately determine the step number over error, and it is possible to stabilize the operation of the effect device.

[Characteristic configuration of error recovery processing]
In the present embodiment, when it is determined in the above-mentioned error determination process (S746) that the number of steps is over error, the error return process at the time of the step number over error is executed, and the error return process is performed a plurality of times (for example, three times). ) If it fails continuously, the drive motor (driving means) is controlled so as to move the effect member toward the initial position. For example, the effect member is moved toward a position where the area overlapping the front of the screen 95a of the effect display device 95 becomes smaller, and the effect member is driven so as not to overlap the front of the screen 95a of the effect display device 95 and interfere with visibility. Make an operation request for a fixed step operation (not an operation using a position detection sensor) to the motor. As a result, it is possible to prevent the effect member from hindering the visibility of the effect display device 95 when an error of exceeding the number of steps occurs.

[Characteristic configuration of operation table]
In the present embodiment, the drive motor (
The stepping motor) is controlled, and the plurality of processing tables are a processing table in which processing is completed when an operation pulse is transmitted to the drive motor a predetermined number of times, and a processing table in which the effect member is movable at the detection position of the position detection sensor (for example, movable). It includes a processing table that ends processing when it moves to the detection position of the position sensor). The processing table, which ends processing when the effect member moves to the detection position of the position detection sensor, allows the effect member to be reliably moved to a movable position or the like, so that a plurality of effect members can be smoothly moved without contacting each other. This makes it possible to stabilize the operation of the effect device.

For example, the first drive motor (stepping motor) for moving the first effect member is controlled based on the first operation table composed of a plurality of processing tables, and the plurality of processing tables are applied to the first drive motor a predetermined number of times. The processing table includes a processing table in which the processing ends when the operation pulse is transmitted, and a processing table in which the processing ends when the first effect member moves to the detection position of the position detection sensor (for example, the detection position of the movable position sensor). When the first effect member moves to the detection position of the position detection sensor, the control of the second drive motor (stepping motor) that moves the second effect member is started based on the second operation table including the plurality of processing tables. As a result, the first effect member can be reliably moved to a movable position or the like, so that the first and second effect members can be smoothly moved without contacting each other, and the operation of the effect device is stable. It becomes possible to make it.

[Modification example]
In the above-described embodiment, the liquid crystal shutter or the light guide plate is provided on the rear surface side of the first light emitting effect unit 572 in the first upper effect member 571 and on the rear surface side of the second light emitting effect unit 582 in the second upper effect member 581. You may do so. By temporarily operating the liquid crystal shutter or the light guide plate so as to obstruct the visibility of the first light emitting effect unit 572 and the second light emitting effect unit 582 to the rear (relative to the screen 561a of the sub-display device 561). During this time, the effect image displayed on the screen 561a of the sub-display device 561 can be changed without being visually recognized by the player. Then, if the operation of the liquid crystal shutter or the light guide plate is stopped, it is possible to perform an effect of suddenly changing the emission color or the like of the first light emitting effect unit 572 and the second light emitting effect unit 582.

In the above-described embodiment, when the effect operation of the sub-display device 561 cannot be performed due to an error of exceeding the number of steps, the information scheduled to be displayed on the screen 561a of the sub-display device 561 is displayed on the screen 95a of the effect display device 95. It may be displayed in.

In the above-described embodiment, the upper right front side effect member 898 is fixedly installed side by side above the lower right front side effect member 891 of the right side effect device 800, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the right side effect device 800, the upper right front side effect member 898 is located near the upper side of the lower right front side effect member 891 at the right side standing initial position and extends in the vertical direction, and the lower side below the upper initial position. An upper right front side drive motor or the like for moving the upper right front side effect member 898 in the vertical direction may be provided at the movable position. In this case, in the upper right front side drive motor or the like, the upper right front side effect member 898 is set to the upper initial position and the lower movable position in a state where the lower right front side effect member 891 is displaced to the right tilt movable position by the lower right front side drive motor 867 or the like. When the upper right front side effect member 898 is moved to the downward movable position by the upper right front side drive motor or the like, it is configured to be located near the upper side of the lower right front side effect member 891 displaced to the right tilting movable position. Will be done. Further, in this case, the upper right front side drive motor or the like is configured to move the upper right front side effect member 898 extending in the vertical direction from the upper initial position to the lower movable position while tilting to the right (or left). As a result, the same effect as in the case of the lower left effect device 600 and the upper left effect device 700 can be obtained.

In the above-described embodiment, the upper left front side drive motor 737 and the like of the upper left side effect device 700 are configured to move the upper left front side effect member 761 extending in the vertical direction from the upper initial position to the lower movable position while tilting to the left. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the upper left front side effect member 761 extending in the vertical direction may be configured to be moved from the upper initial position to the lower movable position while being inclined to the right. The right guide hole 735 of the base portion 731 may be formed into a wavy shape so that the upper left front side effect member 761 may be moved while swinging.

In the above-described embodiment, an example of setting the counter value of the operation pulse of the drive motor has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. Therefore, a third setting example of the counter value of the operation pulse of the drive motor will be described. FIG. 114 schematically shows the relationship between the counter values of the operation pulses when the effect member reciprocates and only the initial position sensor is provided (for example, the effect member that freely falls until it comes into contact with the mechanical stopper). Shown. In FIG. 114, SP21 is a counter value (number of steps) of the operation pulse of the drive motor corresponding to the amount of displacement from the initial position to the limited position (in the direction beyond the initial position) by the mechanical stopper portion. The SP22 is a counter value (counter value) of the operation pulse of the drive motor corresponding to the displacement amount from the sensor detection unit starting to block light from the light receiving unit of the initial position sensor to the initial position (the effect member) when the drive motor is reversed. The number of steps). The SP23 is a counter value of the operation pulse of the drive motor corresponding to the amount of displacement from when the sensor detection unit finishes blocking light from the light receiving part of the initial position sensor to when the drive motor reaches the movable position when the drive motor rotates in the normal direction. (Number of steps). SP24 is a counter value (number of steps) of the operation pulse of the drive motor corresponding to the amount of displacement from the movable position to the limited position (in the direction exceeding the movable position) by the mechanical stopper portion.

The counter value (number of steps) of the operation pulse of the drive motor corresponding to the initial position is set to the initial value (for example, zero value) when the effect member is located at the initial position, and is when the drive motor rotates forward and reverse. Set to a different value. For example, when the drive motor rotates in the normal direction, a predetermined initial value is set as the counter value (number of steps) of the operation pulse of the drive motor corresponding to the initial position. When the drive motor is reversed, a counter value of SP22 is set as the counter value (number of steps) of the operation pulse of the drive motor corresponding to the initial position. The counter value (number of steps) of the operation pulse of the drive motor corresponding to the movable position is not set because the movable position sensor is not provided.

In the case of the third setting example of the counter value of the operation pulse of the drive motor, the error determination value of the step number over error can be set for the ninth error determination section. The ninth error determination section is a section from the movable position when the drive motor is reversed to when the sensor detection unit starts shading the light receiving unit of the initial position sensor. The error determination value ES21 corresponding to the ninth error determination interval is represented by the following equation (9). The coefficient α2 in the following equation (9) is set to a numerical value (for example, 1.2) according to the assembly error of each effect device.

ES21 = SP22 + SP23- (SP23) x α2 ... (9)

Next, a fourth setting example of the counter value of the operation pulse of the drive motor will be described. FIG. 115 schematically shows the relationship between the counter values of the operation pulses when the effect member performs continuous rotational movement (for example, such as a rotary reel) and only the initial position sensor is provided. In FIG. 115, SP31 shows the operation pulse of the drive motor corresponding to the amount of displacement from when the sensor detection unit starts shading the light receiving unit of the initial position sensor to when the effect member reaches the initial position when the drive motor is reversed. Counter value (number of steps) of. The SP32 is a counter value of the operation pulse of the drive motor corresponding to the amount of displacement from when the sensor detection unit starts shading the light receiving part of the initial position sensor when the drive motor rotates in the normal direction to when the effect member reaches the initial position. (Number of steps). The SP33 corresponds to the amount of displacement from when the sensor detection unit finishes shading the light receiving part of the initial position sensor when the drive motor rotates in the normal direction to when it starts shading the light receiving part of the initial position sensor again (by one rotation). It is a counter value (number of steps) of the operation pulse of the drive motor.

The counter value (number of steps) of the operation pulse of the drive motor corresponding to the initial position is set to the initial value (for example, zero value) when the effect member is located at the initial position, and is when the drive motor rotates forward and reverse. Set to a different value. For example, at the time of normal rotation of the drive motor, a counter value (−SP32) is set as the counter value (number of steps) of the operation pulse of the drive motor corresponding to the initial position. When the drive motor is reversed, a counter value (+ SP31) is set as the counter value (number of steps) of the operation pulse of the drive motor corresponding to the initial position.

In the case of the fourth setting example of the counter value of the operation pulse of the drive motor, the error determination value of the step number over error can be set for the tenth to eleventh error determination sections. The tenth error determination section is a section from the initial position at the time of normal rotation of the drive motor until the sensor detection unit starts shading the light receiving unit of the initial position sensor again (by one rotation). The eleventh error determination section is a section from the initial position at the time of reversal of the drive motor until the sensor detection unit starts shading the light receiving unit of the initial position sensor again (by one rotation). The error determination values ES31 to ES32 corresponding to the tenth to eleventh error determination intervals are represented by the following equations (10) to (11). The coefficients α3 in the following equations (10) to (11) are set to numerical values (for example, 1.2) according to the assembly error of each effect device.

ES31 = (SP31 + SP33) x α3 ... (10)
ES32 =-(SP32 + SP33) x α3 ... (11)

In the above-described embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine has been described as an example of a gaming machine to which the present invention is applied, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, an arrange ball, a sparrow ball gaming machine, and a spinning drum. The same can be applied to a pachinko / pachislot machine (slot machine) and the like, and the same effect can be obtained.

PM Pachinko game machine PA Game area 1 Outer frame 2 Front frame 50 Game board 90 Center decoration 95 Direction display device (95a screen)
100 Main control board 200 Effect control board 500 Upper effect device 501 Upper base part 505 Upper support drive motor 506 Upper support drive mechanism 516a Upper initial position sensor 516b Upper intermediate position sensor 516c Upper movable position sensor 521 First upper support 531 2nd upper support part 533a Rotation initial position sensor 533b Rotation intermediate position sensor 534 Display device drive motor 535 Rotation drive mechanism 538 Upper effect part drive motor 539 Upper effect part drive gear 551 Cover light emitting part 553c Rotation movable position sensor 558a Proximity initial position sensor 558c Separate movable position sensor 561 Sub-display device (561a screen)
571 1st upper effect member 571 1st light emission effect member 581 2nd upper effect member 582 2nd light emission effect unit 600 Lower left side effect device 601 Lower left back side base part 603 Lower left back side drive motor 604 Lower left back side drive gear 605a Lower left back side initial position sensor 605c Lower left back side movable position sensor 621 Lower left back side effect member 631 Lower left front side base part 636a Left side standing initial position sensor 636c Left side tilting movable position sensor 637 Lower left front side drive motor 638 Lower left front side drive mechanism 661 Lower left front side effect member 700 Left upper effect device 701 Upper left back side base part 703 Upper left back side drive motor 705a Upper left back side initial position sensor 705c Upper left back side movable position sensor 721 Upper left back side effect member 731 Upper left front side base part 736c Lower movable position sensor 737 Upper left front side drive motor 738 Upper left front side drive mechanism 761 Upper left front side effect Member 800 Right side effect device 801 Right back side base part 803 Right lower back side drive motor 804 Right lower back side drive mechanism 805a Right lower back side initial position sensor 805c Right lower back side movable position sensor 808 Upper right back side drive motor 809 Upper right back side drive gear 810a Upper right back side initial Position sensor 810c Upper right back side movable position sensor 831 Lower right back side effect member 851 Upper right back side effect member 861 Right front side base part 866a Right right standing initial position sensor 866c Right tilt movable position sensor 867 Right lower front side drive motor 868 Lower right front side drive mechanism 891 Lower right front side effect member 900 Lower side effect device 901 Lower base part 904 Movable support part drive motor 905 Movable support part drive mechanism 908a Lower initial position sensor 908c Lower movable position sensor 911 Left arm member 912 Left engagement hole 913 Left Bias spring 916 Right arm member 917 Right engagement hole 918 Right urging spring 921 1st back side movable support 926 Left engagement pin 927 Right engagement pin 931 2nd back side movable support 934 Back side rotation drive motor 935 Back side rotation drive Mechanism 936a 1st back side initial position sensor 936c 1st back side movable position sensor 941 1st back side effect member 946 2nd back side effect member 951 1st front side movable support part 961 2nd front side movable support part 967 front side drive motor 968 front side drive mechanism 969a 1st front side initial position sensor 969c 1st front side movable position sensor 971 1st front side effect member 981 2nd front side effect member

Claims (1)

A plurality of production devices, each of which performs a predetermined production operation, and
It is provided with an effect control means for controlling the plurality of effect devices.
The plurality of effect devices have a plurality of drive sources for causing the plurality of effect devices to perform an effect operation.
The effect control means
In an effect mode in which two or more of the plurality of drive sources cause the corresponding effect device to perform an effect operation, the total value of the current consumption of the two or more drive sources is the first regulated current value. In the case of exceeding, the operation timings of the two or more drive sources are controlled based on a predetermined priority so that the total value of the current consumption becomes equal to or less than the first regulated current value.
Even if the total current consumption of the two or more drive sources does not exceed the first regulated current value, the consumption of the two or more specific drive sources that are at least a part of the two or more drive sources. When the total current value exceeds the second regulated current value lower than the first regulated current value, the two or more so that the total current consumption is equal to or less than the second regulated current value. The operation timing of a specific drive source is controlled based on the priority .
In this interrupt process, it is determined whether or not the first specified current value and the second specified current value are exceeded, and if the first specified current value and the second specified current value are exceeded, In the current interrupt process, the output information related to the predetermined drive source having the higher priority is set within the range not exceeding the first regulated current value and the second specified current value, and in the next interrupt process, the output information is set. A gaming machine characterized in that output information related to a specific drive source having a low priority can be set.

Images